Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
TOPICS COVERED
1. Geometrical Optics
2. Wave optics
3. Electrostatics - 1
4. Electrostatics - 2
5. Current Electricity
6. Capacitance
7. Magnetism
8. E.M.I.
9. Alternating Current
1. B
All the reflected rays meet at a point, when
produced backwards.
2. A 8. B
A plane mirror forms inverted image of
object line perpendicular to it. k
Maximum velocity of the insect is A . Its
m
component perpendicular to the mirror is
k
A sin 60 . Thus, max. relative speed =
m
3 : 25 8 : 35
Object Image
3 k
A .
2 m
3. D
9. B
Deviation produced by plane mirror is given
Perpendicular distance between object &
by
mirror is equal to perpendicular distance
= 180 – 2i
between image & mirror.
here i = 90 – 60 = 30º
Initially the separation between object and
= 180 – 60 = 120º
image is 200 cm. After 6s the mirror has
moved 30 cm towards the object. Hence
4. A
object-mirror separation is 70 cm. So
There is a phase change of 180º in
object image separation is 140 cm.
reflection.
10. B
5. C
From the following figure we can see that
Only a portion of incident light is reflected
incident & reflected ray are parallel to one
by mirror and rest is transmitted in mid
another.
water. So intensity of reflected light is less
st
than intensity of incident light & hence I mirror
Incident
image formed is less bright. ray
6. A
Reflected
By the laws of reflection angle of incidence ray
= angle of reflection
i = r = 38° nd
II mirror
7. C
Perpendicular distance between object & 11. A
mirror is equal to perpendicular distance By the formula for the number of image
between image & mirror. 360
Fig.1 shows original condition when object formed 1 where is angle between
distance is x & mirror is at mean and fig.2
the mirror.
shows final condition then mirror perform
SHM of amplitude 2 cm. 360
No. of images = 1 5
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
4 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
12. B 18. D
A
45º
B B'
90º 60
D C
10cm
1 1 1
=
v u f f
20cm
Here u = –f, f = +f
Here f = +20
1 1 1 u = 20
O
v (f ) f f
1 1 1 1
=0
f v 20 20 v
v =
2 v=
15. D
20. B
Here u = –30 cm, f = –15 cm
object is at centre of curvature
image will be real and of same size.
16. A f=+f
By using mirror formula 2F
u = +x; f = –f
1 1 1 Taking u = – 2f & f = +f
v f x 1 1 1
1 1 (x f ) v u f
= = –ve (always)
v v xf 1 1 1
so if object virtual, image always real.
v 2f f
1 1 1 2 1
17. A = + =
When object is real then image move from v f 2f 2f
focus to pole. v 2f / 3 1
So maximum distance f = 20 cm. m=– = =
u 2f 3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 5
21. B 25. A
Magnification is –3 because image is real &
inverted. i
v
m= rr
u
v e
–3 =
u
Incident angle and emergent angle will be
v = 3u.
20cm same.
given u = –20 cm
the angle between them is 0.
v = –60 cm
By using mirror formula
1 1 1 26. C
– = i = 60º
60 20 f
f = –15 cm Displacement = t sec r sin (i – r) = 5 2
22. D 3 sin r
= 15 sec r 2 cos r 2 = 5 3
Focal length of the mirror is R/2 which
depends on the sphere from which the mirror
is cut out. 3 tan r 1
2 2 3
23. C
Velocity of light varies with medium. The r = 30º
relation between velocity & refractive index Now sin r = sin i
is given as 3 1
= × = 3
n2 v2 2 2
n1 = v1
Where n is refractive index & v velocity of 27. D
light in medium. Both false as critical angle is greater for red
colour (C ) and diamond shines due to
sin i H2 V1 TIR.
= = 1
sin r H1 V2 2
28. D
24. B As sin = constant, the angle of emergence
will be 90°.
29. D
As the ray moves towards the normal while
60º 60º
entering medium 2 from 1 we have n2>n1
for total internal reflection at interface of 2
3 & 3 , n2>n3 besides n3 should also be less
than n2 or else ray would have emerged in
medium 3, parallel to its path in medium 1
hence n3<n1<n2
VA V
VB = =
sin sin
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
6 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
31. C 36. C
We know that formula for deviation
A V 2.5 10 8 = i+e –A & r1 + r 2 = A
B 1.25
B VA 2 108 i= i r2 = 0 r1 + 0 = A
e= 0 r1 = A A
1 4 A= A
C = sin–1 = sin–1 1 sin i = sin A
1. 25 5 i r
Because angles
rarer are small i = A
[As C = sin–1 ]
denser
37. B
For minimum deviation imin = e
32. A
A
and r1 = = r2 = r
2
= i + e – A = 2 (imin – r) = 38º ... (1)
45º 30º Now
45º 30º 44º = 42º + 62 – 2r r = 30º ... (2)
From (1) and (2)
270º imin = 49º
1
= sin 30º
C
C <
sin C < sin
1 1
40º i=e 50º
2
> 2. 39. D
All are true.
35. C
i – e = 23 ....(1) 40. D
23 = i + e – 60° i +e = 83 ....(2) 1 1
From equation (1) & (2) We know that C sin
glass
e = 30° & i =53°
and glass depends on wavelength of light
1. sin 53° = sin r ....(3)
sin (60 – r) = sin 30 ....(4) 1
glass
After solving eq (3) & (4) we get
2 sin53 When is minimum the will be maximum
& hence C will be minimum.
= 1.13
is minimum for voilet hence C is
43 minimum for voilet light.
=
5
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 7
41. B 46. A
Using formula R = 20cm
nv nR nv nR
= n 1 ny =
y 2 t=20 cm
1.56 1.44 1.56 1.44 Paper
= ny = = 1.5
1 .5 1 2 This problem can be drawn as follows
0.12 R = 20cm
= = 0.24
0.5
air
42. B
Disp. (nv-nR) A t = 20cm
45 B n = 1.33 n = 1.5
n1=2 n2=2
2cm x y
10cm
u = –10 R = + 20 cm
2 1 2 1
v 40cm Image is always virtual because rays goes
v 10 20
so virtual image is formed from rarer to denser medium.
1 40
hi = 2
2 10
hi =4 cm so erect, enlarged
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
8 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
49. D 52. C
We know that P = IA & P × t = E
1 1 1
E 1
Hence IA = f R
1 R 2
t
For double convex lens
2
d d2I R1 = R
Initially energy/sec = I ×
2 4 R2 = -2R
= 2
d 2 d
2
54. C
100 cm = R
h
Kh u1
Ku1
Kh
h 1 1 1
( 1)
f R
1 R 2
u2 Ku2
1 1 1 1
= =
2 100 200
For case 1
f = 200 cm
u = –u1 v = –ku1 f = –f
55. A
1 1 1
ku1 + u1 = f ......... (1) We know that on cutting the lens into two
parts perpendicular to its principal axis
For case 2 power of the two parts will be P/2 each. Let
u = –u2 v = ku2 f = –f initial power of lens be P.
1 1 1 Then (P1)f = (P2)f = P/2
– ku + u = ......... (2) Pf = (P1)f = (P2)f = P Pi = Pf
2 2 f
No change in power hence no change in focal
On solving (1) & (2)
length.
1
f= (u1 + u2) 56. A
2
Given RA = 0.9 RB
1 1
51. B
fA fB
B convex mirror
C plane mirror 2 2
(1.63 – 1) R = (xB – 1) R
D diverging mirror A B
xB = 1.7
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 9
57. A 60. A
The convex lenses and the plane mirror are
1
Using the formula P = f in m shown in figure. The combination behaves
like a concave mirror. Let the distance of te
p1 = 2D object from the first lens be x.
For the ray to retrace its path. It should be
100
f1 = = +50 cm incident normally on the plane mirror.
2
From the diagram, we see that for lens L2
f2 = –10
v = , f = +10 cm, u = ?
f2 = –100 cm
1 1 1 Y Y
feq f1 f2
I1
1 1 2 1 1
= = 100 =
50 100 100 O X X
feq = 100 cm L2 L2
x 30
58. C
From the lens equation, we get
1 1 1 f 15cm
v f , u 40cm 1 1 1
or u = – 10 cm
v u f
1 1 1
, v = +24 cm From the diagram, we see that for lens L1
v 40 15
v = 30 – 10 = 20 cm, f = +10 cm, u= – x
This image acts as object for lens L2 From the lens equations, we get
So, u = + ( 2 4 –14) = +10 cm,
v = 30 cm 1 1 1 1 1 1
or or x = 20 cm
v u f 20 x 10
f= ?
1 1 1 1 1 1 61. C
f v u f 30 10 4
y = x = x
f = – 15 cm 3
4
For the mirror, u = –y = x
59. C 3
1 1 1
3 1 2 1 3 2
O
v u f
v u R1 R2 y
1 3 1 x
5 5 3 v 4x 30
1 , 2 , 3
4 3 2 60x
v
R1 = 10 cm, R2 = – 10 cm 2x 45
Let the final image is formed at a distance z
3/ 2 5/ 4 5/ 3 5/ 4 3/ 2 5/ 3 from the mirror, then
v 10 10 60x 1 4 z
2x 45 z 3 and =2 (magnification)
x
180
v cm Solving, we get x = 33.75 cm
7
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
10 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
62. D 64. C
Ray diagram : The path of a typical light ray uf 30 20
v 60cm
is shown in the following figure. The element u f 30 20
encountered is only a lens in either path of
the light rays. 30 cm 60 cm
4 mm
O 2 mm
2 mm
Screen
The lens is cut in half along the axis. So, 4 mm
both halves have the same focallength. Since
two sharp images are formed on the screen,
the result is equivalent to the lens v h2 vh1 60 2
displacement method with D = 80 cm and m = u h h2 = 4 cm
1 u 30
d = 12 cm.
For the lens displacement method, the focal 65. B
length of the lens is given by For normal adjustment
D2 d2 u0 D
f
4D
or f = 19.55 cm u0 × fe = – 100
v D
63. B 1 0 ×
f0 fe = –100
For lens f1
f1 = 30 cm, u = 10 m 25
(1 – 2V0) × f = – 100
e
f1 f2
1 – 2v0 = 4fe .....(1)
Again L = V0 + fe = 6.5 .....(2)
from (1) & (2)
I1 I2
6fe = 12
27.5 cm
fe = 2 cm
30 cm
66. C
v = 30 cm For seeing with relaxed eye, the final image
f2 = 15cm, u = 2.5 cm should be formed at For objective lens
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 200cm
v 25 15 v u0 f0 , f 0 30cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
v = 3 cm
v 15 2.5 3 v0 200 30
600
So, v0 35.3 cm
17
Distance between objective and eyepiece is
L = v0 + fe = 35.3 + 3 = 38.3 cm
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 11
67. B 70. B
Power of liquid lens In this case, the total deviation is shared
between the two surfaces.
2 6
= (1.6–1) ×10 = 6 D
0.20 10
Power of concave lens
= (1.5–1) (–2/.20) = –5D
Total power of two concave lenses = – 10 D
Power of system = –10 D + 6 D = – 4 D
1
Focal length = = –0.25 m
4
68. A
Here, fv = 2 cm and fe = 3 cm.
Using les formula for eyepiece,
1 1 1
u v1 fe
1 1 1
u1 = – 3cm [ i = 0]
u 3
But the distance between objective and
eyepiece is 15 cm (given).
Therefore, distance of image formed by the
71. B
objective, v = 15–3 = 12 cm. Let u be the By Theory
object distance from the objective, them for
1 1 1 72. A
1 1 1
objectives lens u v f or By Theory
0 u 12 2
73. B
1 1 1 5 12
u 2.4 cm
u 2 12 12 5 fO
(a) is the correct option. f e = 10
f0 = 10fe = 10×20 = 200 cm
69. B 74. C
f1 = + 40 cm By Theory
(for convex lens)= 0.4 m
f2 = – 25 75. B
(for concave lens) p = 1/f = –0.5D
= – 0.25 m
Therefore, focal length
(f) of the combination,
1 1 1
f f1 f2
1 1 0.25 0.4
0.40 0.25 0.40 0.25
0.15
1.5D
0.1
1
P= =–1.5D
f
(b) is the correct option.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
12 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. C 4. D
7 : 34 : 23
| 2L |
|
3
AH = A'H' = A'E' + E'H'
| 2L |
E'H = 1.2 And AH=1.2 + 0.1 = 1.3 m.
Hence boy cannot see his feet.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 13
6. A
d
2 36 rad / s
dt
dy d
10 cos ec2
A dt dt
25
10 36 1000 m/s
9
O B
9. B
Component of velocity of object to mirror
Deviation at A = 180 – 2i1 (AC) follows the condition.
Deviation at B = 180 – 2i2 (AC)
VIM VOM for z component only
In OAB 90 – i1 + 90 – i2 + 60 = 180°
i1+i2 = 60° VI 8 5 8
Net deviation = 1 + 2
= 360 – 2 (i1 + i2) VI 11 k̂
= 360 – 2 × 60 = 240° The remaining components remain same as
From line BC
120o 60o that of the object so VI 3 î 4 ĵ 11k̂
180 + = 240
= 60º 240
o
10. C
7. A
I
O 20m
C
30m
3m
S
300m
x
A 1m B
x 300 x hi 9 v
20 100 h0 = 3 = u
Let OI = x 3u = v
100x = 6000 + 20x 3 (x – 300) = x
80x = 6000
3x – 900 = x
600 2x = 900
x= cm
8 x = 450 cm.
25 × 3
= 75 cm 11. D
OS = OI = 75 cm Given
hi h 1 v
8. C m= h = = =–
0 nh n u
u
v= –
n
Using mirror formula
n 1 1 n 1 1
–
u u f u f
10m
u = –f(n – 1)
9 | u | = f(n – 1)
2 18 rad / s
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
14 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
12. B 17. A
f
y
x
f
In convex mirror Image is not at infinity ()
13. B
y 4 dy 4 dx
= 8 m/sec
x 3 dt 3 dt
C
18. D
For IInd reflection
Minimum value of = 45º =–2c
=–2i
= –c i
2 i)–
14. B –1 (n
sin
n
si
Using mirror formula =
i
i=0 i=i i=90
1 1 1
=
v u f
19. D
The equation is in the form of y = mx + c.
1
c
On comparing we see that taking on c cos = cos
v n
n cos = cos
1
y-axis and on x-axis than m (slope) is –1 1 sin = n sin
u
1 sin 2
and is intercept on y-axis. n2 cos2 + 1
f n2
1
C
c cos air
v
c glass
cos
n
C/n
1/u
1 1 1
sin 2
n2 – n2 sin2 + 1
v u f n2
15. D
1 2 2
sin2 n 2 n 1 n
16. C n2 1 n 2
Real depth = d = 1m sin2 = n
Virtual depth = d’ = 0.9m
1 n2
d' 1 n 1
sin =
d 1 n 2
1 10 tan = n]
= =
0.9 9
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 15
20. A 24. B
4 5
w , g
3 3 A
1 4
sin C =
w r
w g g 5 c
1 4
C sin (A)
5 From properties of prism
r+C=A
21. C
1
r = A – C = 75 – sin–1 = 30º
2
1.sin i = 2 sin r
1
53° i = sin–1 2
2
i = 45º
1
sin C =
1.4
C = 45.58 25. A
For TIR to take place > C.
= 1 – 2 = 0
22. C
Using formula for relation between min & A. (1 – 1)A1 – (2 – 1)A2 = 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
16 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
28. A
3
sin c = c 60
n1 = 3/2 n2 = 4/3 2
x=R
x O y
• •
31. D
x 2 1 2 1
v x R
4 3 32. C
n2 = , n1 =
3 2
1 1 1
R = –10 cm u = –x p ( 1) ... (1)
f R1 R2
4 3 4 /3 3 /2
3v 2x 10 1 1
Now p' = 1 R R ... (2)
1 3 1 3 0 1 2
v 4 60 2x
p' 0
for real image v > 0
p 0 ( 1)
3 1 3
> 0 x > 90 cm 33. B
4 60 2x
v
29. D m = –0.5 =
u
u
10cm v= – = +5cm
2
4
3
1 1 1 2 1
7.5cm =
5cm f 5 10 10
10
f= cm convex lens.
3
4 / 3 1.5 4 / 3 1.5 1 1 1
v = 30cm
v1 7.5 5 v 10 15
v1 = –8cm 2
30
for 2nd Refraction dv = – du
2=1 1 = 4/3 15
u2 = –(10 + 8) = –18 cm dv = –4mm
1 27
so apparent depth = (18) cm 35. B
4 /3 2
= –13.5 cm
30. C
c 30cm
x
Ray retraces its path when it appears to
come towards centre of curvature
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 17
R = 20
1 1 1 1 1 4 1 3
F = 10 cm
For ray to retrace its path it must fall v f u 50 200 200 200
normally on mirror. 200
v cm
3
36. C Also, magnification produced by objective
v lens
m=3= v = 3u
u v 200 / 3 1
u = –10cm v = +30 cm m0 =
u 200 3
1 1 1 Image I1 acts as an object for eye lens.
+ = f Here, v = –25 cm, f = 5cm
30 10 eq
1 1 1
30
feq = cm f2 = –30 f v u
4
1 1 1 1 1 15
1
1 1 1 1 4 u v f 25 5 25
feq = f1 f2 = f1 30 = 30
25
f1 = 6 cm u cm
6
And magnification produced by eye lens.
37. B v 25
me 6
Let the object distance be x, Then, the image u (25 / 6)
distance is D–x.
From lens equation, 40. B
1 1
1 1 1 ve
f1 f2
x Dx f
On algebraic rearrangement, we get 1 2 1 2
0 f f
x2 – Dx + Df = 0 f1 f2 1 2
44. B
38. C
Real, inverted and magnified O
D
39. A dmin = O × 1 km
Given u = –200 cm, f = 50 cm
For image I1 of object formed by objective _ 5 mm
~
lens,
45. A
1 1 1 (1.64 – 1) [x] = 10 cm = fy
f v u
10
We have fv – fR = [0.66 – 0.62] = 0.625 cm
0.64
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
18 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
MI IA 80 20
160 cm
hmax = 320 cm
G
4. A,B
v
Given 2 v = ±2
u
B B'
1 1 1
from
Using similar EHG & EE ' B' v u f
EE' EH 1 1 1
±
E' B' HG 2u u f
EE' = 2EH & E'B' = 160 cm after solving u = –30, –10 cm
HG = 80 cm
FH = 5 cm 5. B,C
Hence length of mirror required is FG = 85
cm and bottom of mirror should be 80 cm
or less above the ground or else feet will B' A' A B A'' B''
not be visible.
30 10 10 30 10
2. B,D
Field of view is same for all positions of the 50
mirror and hence spot on wall remains for A’ u = –60 f = 60 v = +30
unaffected for B’ u = –90 f = 60 v = +36 cm
fov. Image length = 6cm
s 1
Magnification =
5
s2
6. B,C
hi v
s1 Using mirror formula =
h0 u
hi 1 v
Given h = =
0 2 u
u
3. A,B,D hence v =
2
given
u = –40 v = 20
Using mirror formula
B 1 1 1
Q 40 20 f
hmin hmax
1 1
p = f = 40
f 40
I M S A convex mirror with focal length = 40 cm
use similar traingles
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 19
8. A,D
Shift by a glass slab of thickness t is given 12. A,C
1 5 4
by t 1 sin30º = sin2 60°
3 3
And shift is towards the path of incident light. 60°
2 = sin–1 5 60°
8 30°
9. A,B,C 5
The object will now O' .sin60º = sin 90º 30°
appear to be placed at 3
C
O' which is a point I 5
between C & for =
mirror. So image is 2 3
formed
between C & O. 13. A,C
= (– 1) A A & – 1
10. B,C,D
For critical angle
14. B,C,D
2
sin C = A for min deviation there are two angles
1
c of incidence
3
90º – C > sin–1 c B i = e so r 1 = r2
1
C i = 90º or e = 90º for max
3 90-C
cos C > D min = ( – 1)A
1
2 2 2 deviation.
1 3 2
... (C)
B have deviation without dispersion.
12 22 23 ... (D)
C have dispersion and average deviation.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
20 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
st
2 image
240 360 O
• (due to
u = –d, R = +60,
combination)
3
2 = 1 = 1
2 st
3 mage
3 1 1.5 1
2V d 60
1
On cutting lens into two halves power of each
3 1 1 section becomes P/2 on combining them
2V 120 d
1 again net power of system becomes P so
If d1 = 120 v = focal length of two system (ii) and (iii) is
Retraces path same.
6 cm
• •
P 1
P
x x y
2 1 1
2 D = 90 cm
v x R
h0 = h0 h1 h2 6cm
2 1 2 1
v x R h1 v 9 3
If 2 > 1 v = –ve h0 u 6 2
If x is –ve and 1 > 2 v = +ve
v: u=3:2
uv + u = 90
18. A,C
v = 54, u = 36 d = 18
10 15 D2 d2
f=
4D
4 902 182
= f= f = 21.6 cm
3 4 90
3 21. ABCD
=
2
D = 96 cm
1 3 1 1 1 1
1 I1
f1 2 10 15 f1 12 4
I2
1 4 1 1 2
1
f2 3 15 15 45 O I1 I 2 I1 I 2 O 2
1 1 2 O2 O
I 22 2
fm 15 / 2 15 4 I2
1 2 1 2 5 (ratio of length of object to shorter image)
2
feq 15 12 4 .5 90
O 1
feq = –18 cm
I1 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 21
v 20
Magnification, m1 1
u 20
I1 O I2 I3
Image is real and inverted, same size as
object .
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
22 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 23
1. 4n R
If a mirror rotates through an angle , the
B
image rotates through an angle 2. There-
fore, the linear speed of the light spot is
v = 2 R = 2 R (2 n) = 4 n R
A
2. 3d C
From ABC
Refer to figure. It is clear that the greatest
+ + 90 + = 180
distance is AB. Now, since PR = RD = L,
3 = 90
from triangles PRT and PBD we have
= 30º
B
5. circle
All the images formed by two plane.
T Mirror inclined to each other form images
which lie on a circle.
P D
R
6. 120° anticlockwise and 240° clockwise.
d O
S
30o 30o
C
Q
A
= 180 – 2i angle of incidence
d = 180 – 2(30)
BD = 2RT = 2RS = 2× =d
2 = 120º anticlockwise
= 180 + 2(30)
d
and OD = . Therefore. OB = OD + BD = 240º clockwise.
2
d 3d 7. Due to turning of incident ray by 10º
d
2 2 reflected ray also gets turned by 10°
anticlockwise Due to turning of mirror by
3d 20º ray gets turned by 40° (2) clockwise.
AB = 2OB = 2× =3d.
2 Angle turned by reflected ray = 40 – 10
= 30 clockwise
3. first
8. Positioin of image = (1 cos 60°, –1 sin
60º 60°), Velocity of image=1 cos 60° i ,
30º Parallel to
II
60º 30º Mirror 1 +1 sin 60° j m / s
M
30º 30º
Parallel to
Mirror 2
60º 60º 60º
I
1 30o
O
4. = 30° v2
x
v2
The ray will retrace its path if it falls
I
normally on the mirror i.e. at third reflection
angle of incidence is 0.
Co-ordinate of image
= (1 cos60°, – 1 sin 60°)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
24 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Y M 12. 0
Minimum distance between object and
image is zero when image concides with the
object i.e., object is placed at 2F.
i 30o 13. 10 cm
O
60°
x f = – 10 cm. For end A, vA = –15 cm.
1 1 1
Using v u f , we have
e
A A
Resultant velocity . of 1
1 1 1
| v | 2 cos2 60 1sin2 60 vA = – 30 cm
v A 15 10
1/2 1
tan The negative sign shows that the image A’
3 /2 3 of end A is at a distance of 30 cm to the left
ˆˆ
In i.j form of P [see Figure]
v 1cos 60ˆi 1sin60ˆj m/s
O I
9. x=2 A' B A P
30 cm
10. 20 m
Irrespective of the type of mirror.
For end B, uB = – 20 cm. Thus
1 1 1
4 vB = – 20 cm
11. ms-1 vB 20 10
9
The side view mirror of a car is a convex The negative sign shown that the image B’
mirror, Given f = +10 m and u = –50 cm. of end B is at a distance of 20 cm to the left
1 1 1 of P, i.e.., B’ coincides with B. This is
Using these values in , we have
e expected because (since R = 2f = 20 cm), B
v u f
is at the centre of curvature of the mirror.
1 1 1 50
v=+ m The length of the image of rod AB is
v 50 10 6
A’B’ = 30 – 20 = 10 cm
1 1 1
Differentiating with respect to t, 14. 20 cm
v u f
The apparent depth of the object is (See
1 dv 1 du figure)
we have 0
v2 dt u2 dt
dv v2 du O
2 6cm
dt u dt
dv v2 du
or 2 14cm
dt u dt
24cm
v2 | 32cm
Speed of image = × speed of
u2
ambulance (object) |'
(50 / 6)2 4
16 ms1
(50)2 9
Object
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 25
32 dv v 2 du
d 24cm 2
4 /3 dt u dt
Image will go towards right.
Thus I’ is the images of object due to
refraction/. This image serves as the virtual 17. Real, inverted, height = 4 cm
object for the concave mirror forming the
final image I due to reflection. 18. 3m
In order to find the minimum diameter to
Now u = OI’ = – (24+6) = – 30 cm
block all the light we need to find the
and v = OI = – (14+6) = – 20 cm maximum radius of the circle formed.
Using these values in the spherical mirror
formula
1 1 1 r
f v u
we have
4m
1 1 1 1
f 20 30 12
or f = – 12 cm.
r 3
15. +2 tan = = sin–1
4 5
For M1 u1 = –30cm, f1 = 20cm 3 r 3
tan–1 = =
1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4
[For radius to be maximum = C] r = 3m
v1 u1 f1 v1 30 20 Diameter = 6 m
1 1 1 23 1
= =
v1 30 20 60 60 19. 12 × 3 / 7
v1 = –60 cm
R
For M2
u2 = +(60 – (10 + 30)) = +20 cm 4
=
|
3
f2 = +10cm 12cm
1 1 1
v2 = +20 cm
v 2 20 10 Fish
Now for M1 R
tan C = ...... (1)
v1 12
m1 = – u A ray of light intering at 90º from rarer
1
v2 medium makes an angle of refaction equal
For M2 m2 = – to critical angle in the denser medium and
u2
v1 v 2 critical angle is given by
Total MT = m1 × m2 = u u 3
1 2
C = sin–1
(60)(20) 4
= MT = +2 3
(30)(20)
C = tan–1 ...... (2)
7
Equation (1) & (2)
16. towards right
3 R 12 3
= R=
7 12 7
v I1
O v
M1
I1 will behave as an object for M2. Hence
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
26 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
30°
60°
135°
15° r
i = 30 n=2
t r = 15
20. 23. r' r' > c
d 1 / cos15
T
v 3 108 / ice 24. 2cm
c
2 sin30
T 108 sec ice sin15
3 3.2 / 2 4
tanc
2 5
4 1 41
Apparent depth 1 sinc
21. 41 4
real depth n1
h 3
(90–r)
40 4
h = 30 cm
r
25.
22. sin n12 n22
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 27
27. 38°
90
29. 60°
n1 = 1, n2 = 2, A = 90°, r2 = 60°
r1 = 30
1 sin c = 2 tan 30°
x
x1 x2 sin i = 1
In the graph for angle of deiration v/s angle i = 90°
of incidence the shift in angle of incidence
on right side is more than that of left side 30. red
From the formula
x2 > x 1. Hence only one angle is sutable
e = 38º. Appartent depth nair
Re al depth nglass
28. 30° nair
Apparent depth = Real depth x
nglass
60º The letter which appear least raised has
maximum Apparent depth and hence it has
i minimum for glass.
r1 r2
1
for to be minimum should be maximum
which is for Red.
1.68 1.56
For light be transmitted the ray should not 31. (a) =
1.6 1
suffer TIR at second refraction. Hence = 0.20
r2 < C. (b) = (1.68 –1.56)6
If maximum value of r2 is less than C then = 0.72°
the ray will be always transmitted
r1 + r 2 = A 32. = 1 –2 = 0
(r2)max = 60º – (r1)min (y1 –1) A1 – (y2 –1) A2 = 0
For r1 to be minimum i should be minimum (1.62 – 1) 6 – (1.518–1) A2 = 0
A2 = 7.2
7
sin (imin) = sin (r1)min
3
In limiting case (r2)max = C 60°
r
r 60°
sini min
60°
C = 60 – sin–1 33.
1 1 1 sini min
sin = 60 sin 2r = 60° r = 30°
sin60° = sin30 = 3
sini 3
sin1 = 60 – sin–1 R =30cm
7 34. Let u = x n2 = 3/2
n1 = 4/3 v=
sini 3 3 1 3
= cos (sin–1 ) – n2 n1 n2 n1 3/2
2 7 2 7 = 4/3
v u R A B
3 /2 4 /3 3 /2 4 /3
7 3 2 3
sin i = x 30
3 2 7 2 7 x = 240 cm away from surface
1
sin i = 1 i = 30º
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
28 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
air
40. For 1st surface n2 = 2 , n1 = 1
n
R1 = + R
u1 = –
35. (a) 1 2R
r 2 2 2 v1
v1 R 2 1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 29
0
ll
llllllllllllllllll lllll
from eq. (1) & (2) Here, L = 20 cm; f0 = – 1.0 cm; fe = 2.0 cm
R = 30 f = 60 We know that D = 25 cm
1 1
ll
l ll
1 20 25
60 30 M=– 1
1.0 2.0
= 1.5
= 20×13.5 = 270
47 . Here, = 0.021 ; = 1.53 ;
54. 151.5 cm
’ = 0.045 ; ’ = 1.65 ; A’ = 4.2°
For no dispersion, + ’’ = 0 fO
or A (–1) + ’A’ (–1) = 0 55. fe = 10
' A'( 1)
or A
( 1) 100
56. P= –
40
.045 4.2 (1.65 1)
= – 2.5 D
0.021 (1.53 1)
= –11.04°
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
30 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
(d2 r2 ) 2d d2 r2 d2 r2
u M1 3L (d r)2 (r2 d2 )
L
2d(d d2 r2 )
M2 2 rd
L
r2 r
L 2
r(d d r ) 2
d d2 r 2
2L 2L
3L dv v 2 du
4. 2 .
dt u dt
2
v 1
M1 moves on line parallel to the mirrors so VIM . Vom VI VM ( Vo Vm )
u 100
to find out where M2 will be able to see image
of M1 we have to find the total length where given VIM 1 cm / sec
M1 is visible of M2 so rays originate from M1
VM 20 m / sec
& after reflection meet at M2. By using similar
triangles.
We find total visible length is equal to 20m/sec
(3L + 3L) = 6L.
Hence time duration will be h
Distance 6L h/10
= =
speed u 1cm/sec
d x f=10m
3. m
x
1
1 1 2 1 10 2 m / sec ( Vo – 20 m / sec)
( 2x d) . r 2 (dx x 2 ) 100
d x x r
v 0 21 m / sec
2x 2 2x(r d) rd 0
v 1 1
m v v 1
2 (r d) 4(r d)2 8 rd u f v f
x
2 2
dm dv
1 10 3 / sec
dt dt . f
x
d xR 2n2
5.
n1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 31
6. 1.5
3
10. 1. sin (90 ) sin r
2
6 6
7. x d/ 2 3
x dx cos sin r
2
4 / 3 sin i 1. sin r
90
4 d/2 d/ 2
3 d2 d2 90 – x
(10 .67 )2 62
4 4 r
17 ft
x
6 ft 6 ft
2
r sin r cos
11ft 3
x
i 90 – x > c
5 ft rc sin( r ) sin c
sin r cos cos r . sin 8 / 9
4 inch
d/2
d 2 9 4 cos 2
cos 2 . sin 8 / 9
3 3
d 16 feet
8
9 4 cos 2 . sin 2 cos 2
3
dy
8. 4x y 2x 2 64 32
dx (9 4 cos 2 ) (1 cos 2 ) 4 cos 4 cos 2
9 3
tan 2 2 1 2x 2
1 17 sec 2 21 2
cot 2 2 x cos 2 tan
2 21 17 17
1
sin sin 1 1/ 3
3 11. ( 1)A 1.25
u sin = sin 90° = 1 net = ( – 2A) + 2A( – 1)
= 3 180 2A ( 1) . 2A 180 6.5
9. sin–1 (tan r)
r + r’ = 90º r’ = (90 – r) 1 2 A
1 sin r = 2 cos r
i 2A
2 i – 2A
i .2 A
r'
A 2
r r 13
8
2
tan r =
1
2
Critical angle = sin–1
1
= sin–1 (tan r)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
32 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Vy
14.
12.
u
120 cm Vy
u = – 30 f = 40 cm V = + 120 cm
Relative = 2 Vy
1 1 ( 1) dh i fh0
2 V f h 0 du
Feq
n
30 60 hi .h0 dt 2
.
u (u f ) (u f ) dt
y is focal length
hi h
0 ...(4)
yv y
1 1 1
...(5)
v 5 y
Solve (1), (4) & (5)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 33
19. 0° D 25
M= = = 2.1
f 12
30º
i=60º
i e
= 30º = i + e – A
60 + e – 30 = 30
e= 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
34 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. B 4. B
The situation is shown in figure For total internal reflection
1 from glass-air interface,
sin C critical angle C must be less A C
R
A than angle of incidence
AB B
tan C
OA i.e., C < i
12 cm
AB OA tan C O or C < 450 ( i 450 )
B
OA 1 1
or AB But n = C sin1
2 1 sin C n
12 36 1
2
or sin 1 450
4 7 n
1
3 1 0 1
or sin 45 or n
n sin 450
2. A
1
or n or n 2
y (1 / 2 )
We know 1.22
D d
5. A
yd D = (-1)A
D
1.22
For blue light is greater than that for red
3 3 light. So, D2 > D1
10 x 3 x 10
D 5m D
1.22 x 5 x 10 7 max 5m
6. B
Power of a lens is reciprocal of its focal length.
3. A
power of combined lens is
1 1 1 P = P1+P2
( 1) ...(i)
fa R
1 R 2 = -15 + 5 = -10D
1 100
f 10 cm
1 1 P 10
(1.5 1)
R
1 R 2
7. C
1 1 1
1 g m 1 1 = constant, so (c) is the correct
v u f
and fm m R R
1 2 graph.
8. A
1 1.5 1 1
1 It is passible
fm 1.6 1R R 2
when object kept
v
at centre of
or fm 8 x fa
curvature.
(v)
1 1 1 u= v
8x fa m = 1.6 m u u(u>f)
5 P 5 u = 2f, v = 2f.
Pm = / fm= 1 D
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 35
9. D 14. C
15. A
1 Note: As refractive index for z > 0 and z
sin r sin (900 C) cos C
2 0 is different X-Y plane should be boundary
sin 2 2 1 between two media. Angle of incidence
; sin x
sin r 1 3 2
AZ 1
1 cos i =
sin 1 A A2y A2z
2
2
x
3
i = 600
10. B
sin i 3
As intensity is maximum at axis, From Snell's law
sin r 2
will be maximum and speed will be
r 450
minimum on the axis of the beam.
beam will converge. 16. A
1 1 1
11. A
u v f
12. C 1 du 1 dv
2 0
u dt v2 dt
1
Apparent shift h = 1 h dv v2 du
2
dt u dt
Apparent shift produced by water,
v f
1 But
h1 1 h1 t uf
1 2
dv f du
and apparent shift produced by kerosene,
dt u f dt
1 0.2
2
h2 1 h2 1
2 x 15 ms1
2 . 8 0 .2 15
1 1
h h1 h2 1 h1 1 h2 17. D
1 2
13. B 1 1 1
S 1 t 1 1cm cm
1. 5 3
1 1 1
( 1) For focal length of the lens,
f R1 R2
1 1 1 1 1
Also, by Cauchy's formula
f v u 12 240
B B
A .... 1 20 1 240
2 4 or f cm.
f 240 21
As blue red Now, to get back image on the film, lens
blue red 1 35
has to form image at 12 cm = cm
Hence, fblue fred 3 3
such that the glass plate will shift the
image on the film.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
36 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 21
As ,
f v u u v f 35 240 1 1 sin
sin A sin <
48 3 7 21 1 m
1680 560
u 5.6 m
1 1
sin–1 sin A sin m <
18. C
19. D
23. B
Since 4/3 < 3/2 thus f1 > f
By theory
since 5/3 > 3/2 thus f2 changes sign
20. D 24. D
Green
1
f > fgreen
< green
35° 79°
> green T.I.R
21. B
Bends upwards A m
sin
2
&
A
sin
2
25. B
f=25cm
f=20cm
22. C
A
r2 < c
r2 < sin–1 (1/)
sin r2 < 1/ r1 r2 15cm
sin = sin r1 1 1 1
– =
r1 = sin–1 (sin/) v u f
sin (A – r1) < 1/ 1 1 1
– =
v (40 ) 20
1 sin 1
sin A sin < 1 1 1
+ =
v 40 20
sin 1 1 1 1 1
A – sin–1 < sin–1
= – =
v 20 40 40
v = 40
1 sin
A – sin–1 < sin–1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 37
2
1 1 2
v 12 cm
v 20 15
33.25 cm
25 cm
r
6. C
(C) 20
1 1 1
f = 5 cm
4 10 10 f
2nd Refraction L v1 15 n 2 ; n1 1 = Error u = 0.1 cm, v = 0.1 cm
3
d 25 cm f u v
f 0.05 cm
25 4 f2 u2 v2
75 4v1 60 v1 135
v1 15 3 4 7. B
135
v1 , f = 18 .3 cm 20 cm
4
3. B
2 1
C for interface I & II sin c c = 45º
2 2 rf
3
C for interface II & III sin c c = 60º
2 8. (A) - P ;(B) - R; (C) - R; (D) - P, Q, S
9. C
2 I
10. C
11. B
2 II
12. A
A
r1 r2 30 º
3 III 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
38 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
–1 1 –1 19. B
(i) (42, 56) (correctly recorded) Object is placed at the 2f of lens. Image formed by
42 56 24
lens will behave as object for plane mirror (virtual
–1 1 –1 object finally)
(ii) (48, 48) (correctly recorded)
48 48 24 for lens
u = + 10 cm
1 1 –1 f = 15 cm
(iii) (66,38) –
66 38 24.1 1 1 1 6cm
10cm 20cm
1 1 –1 1 v u f 10cm
– (Incorrect) 1 1 1 30 cm
= 150°
°
37
60°
r + + + 135° = 360° 185°
c 20.
45°
30 + 150 + + 135° 45°
R
30°
= 360° 90° 3 60° 1
A
60°
D sin c = C = 37° 4
= 45° 53
So angle of incidence R
tan 37° =
8 cm
at CD is 45°
3 R
Critical Angle for the surface = R = 6 cm
4 8
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 39
1 1 1 1 3
– = – 1 1 1 1 1 1
u f v 10 25
feq f1 f2 28 70 20
u1 = – 50 cm feq = 20 cm
50
for v = 1 1 1
7
R=20 m v u f
1 1 1
u 10 50 = u2 = – 25 m
2 1 1 1
v = 40 cm
v 40 20
25 18
speed of object =
30 5
speed of object = 3 km/hr. 29. B
By definition
22. from laws of Refraction n = C/V
n1 sin i = n2 sin r
so V = C/n.
Denser to Rarer Away from normal
Rarer to Denser Towards the normal.
30. C
23. B n1sin1 = n2 sin2
As intensity is maximum at axis, sin1 = –x sin2 (x is R.I)
will be maximum and speed will 2 must be negative.
be minimum on the axis of the beam. so (C)
beam will converge.
31. C
24. D 24m
h
For a parallel cylinderical beam, wavefront O 8m h/3
will be planar.
from wavelength ratio
= 1.5 (from 1/2)
25. A
1 1 1
+ = (1.5 – 1)
26. After Critical angle all the rays are Reflected 8 24 R
and so No transmition occurs. R = 3m Ans.
32. A
1 1 1 1 1 1
27.
v 24 8 v 8 24 i r
3
v = 12 cm 2 1
1
2
2 - 3
4 2
d = 12 × = 16
3
Mirror in x–z plane
d = 18 – 16 = 2 cm
Since y component is reversed
28. B (1/2) 1
Left lens tan= =
( 3/2) 3
1 1 1 1
(1.5 1) – =30°
f1 14 28
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
40 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
33. D 1 1
(P) e f : No TIR and ray at surface 1 f1 2r
and 2 going to us normal and at surface of
1 3 1 1
2 and 3 going away from normal. So, 1
f2 2 r
2 > 1
(Q) e g : No bending So 1 = 2 1 1 1
feq 2r 2r
(R) e h : No TIR at surface 1 and 2
feq = -r
away from normal and again at surface 2
and 3 bending away from noraml hence 2 1 3 1 1
1
f1 = 2 r r
> 3. No TIR hence 2 2 > 1.
1
=
2 r
(S) e i : TIR hence sin 45º >
1 1 3 1 1 1
1
f2 = 2 r
=
2r
1
2 <
2 1 1 1
feq = 2r
1 > feq r 2r
2 2.
P- 2 Q- 4 R- 3 S- 1
34. C
11.54 36. A,C
2 Air to Glass
2
sin C = 11.54
100
2 1.4 1 1.4 1
V1 - = R
.....(1)
n
Also sin C =
2.72
5.77 M 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.4
= – V = .....(2)
133.3 2.72 V 1 R
n = 1.36
From (1) and (2)
35. D
1 L 1 1 1.5 0 .5
= 1 R R f1 = R f1 = 3R
f m 1 2
1 3 1 1 1 1 2
1 2 r Glass to Air
f1 2 r r f1
1 1 1 1 1 r 1.4
feq 1.5 1.4 1.5 0 .1
f1 r f r r 2 V1 – = = ....(3)
eq (R) R
1 3 1
1
f1 2 r
1 1.4 1 1.4 0.4
1 1 – V = = .....(4)
V (R ) R
f1 2r 1
1 1 1 1 1
feq f1 f2 feq r 1 0 .5
feq = r f2 = R
f2 = 2R
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 41
37. 0007
1 1.5 1 1.5
v 50 10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
+ =– = – v 20 100
v (15) 10 v 15 10
23 1 53
= =–
30 30 100
v (30)
v = – 30 cm & m1 = – = – =–2 1 2
u (15)
v 100
Image from lens
1 1 1 100
– = v 50
v u f 2
now for S2
1 1 1
+ = 20cm 2 1 2 1
v 20 10
v u R
1 1 1 u= –x
=
v 10 20 v
v = – 20 cm 1.5 1 1 .5 1
– =
m2 = – 1 x 10
|M1| = |m1 × m2| = 2 x = +20
In air for lens d = 50 + 20 = 70 cm
1 1 2 39. 2
= R = 10 cm i 60
f 2 R
1 × sin 60° = n × sin r1
When dipped 3
r1 sin1
2m
1 3 6 2 2 2 4 2
= 1 = × = = By snell’s law
f' 2 7 10 7 10 70 35
3
1 sin n sin 60 sin1
2n
1 2 1 87
= – = m2 = 7 |M2| = 14
v' 35 10 140 3 4n2 3 1 3
sin
|M2|/|M1| = 7 2 2 2 2
Differentiating w.r.t. n :
38. B
3 8n
S1 S2 cos d · dn
2 2 4n2 3 2
x
60, n 3
50cm
1 d 3 8 3
dn
2 dn 2 2
2 1 2 1
2 4 3 3 2
v u R
d
2
dn
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
42 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
O = 30 cm
1 1 1
fm = 10 – 30
fm = 15 cm R = 30 cm
For lens
convex mirror
1 n
For TIR = C sin 2
n1
r = 90° – O 10 cm
n (sin i) = n1 sin r = n1 cos
n sin im n1 cos c v
m = –2 = v = 24 = 60 cm
u
n22 1 1 1 1 1 1
n1 1 n12 n22 – =+ f f = + f2 = 20
n12 v u 2 2 60 30
cm
1 2 1 1
NA = sin im = n1 n22
n f2 = (n – 1) R
Now put values.
1 1
= (n – 1)
41. D 20 30
Which is lesser
3
n= +1
2
42. A n = 2.5
44. A,B,C
(A) l is independent of n2.
(B) l is dependent on n (z) as the lateral
45° 90° 1
30° 45° displacement varies as z varies.
sin c =
45° 2 (C) This is always true
2 n1 sin i = n2 sin f
45. C
1 sin 45° = 2 sin r
1 46. A
= sin r r = 30°
2
+ 120° + 45° = 180°
R d/2
+ 165° = 180° R- t t
= 180° – 165° = 15°
R d/2
d2
R2 = (R – t)2 +
4
d2
R2 = R2 + t2 – 2 tR + (t2 is neglect)
4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Geometrical Optics | 43
d2 d2 1
2tR = R= 1.6× = (1.6–m(0.1))1
4 8t 2
36 cm2 120 0.8 = 1.6 – 0.1m
R= = = 15 cm 0.1 m = 0.8 m = 8
8 0.3 cm 8
1 1 49. 130
= ( – 1)
f R
1 1 1 Area=A
= = Screen
f 15 30
f = 30
R
r Area=a
47. A,C,D
At minimum deviation
r1 = r2 = A/2 & i = e, m = A
sm = i + e – A = A i = A = e 20cm 2cm
By similar triangles :
i e
r1 r2
r 2 1
= =
R 20 10
1 1 a
A m Ratio of area = (10)2 = =
sin sin A
100 A
Also, =
2
= A = 2 cos A
A sin 2 Let energy incident on the lens is E.
sin 2
2 E Energy
sin i = sin r1 & sin r2 = sin 90° = 1.3 (Intensity =
A Area Time
1 Hence, E = A × 1.30
1
sin r 2 = = A & cos r 2 =
2 cos a 1
2 Also =
A 100
1 sin2 r2 Average intensity of light 22 cm away from
E A 1.3
lens = = = 100 × 1.3
a a
i e=90°
r1 r2 = 130 kW/m 2
50. D
A As we can see from figure that the common
4 cos2 1
2 ray for all the points on the hypotenuse,
= A passes through focus. Thus the rays after
2 cos
2 reflection from mirror become parallel to
Then, sin i = sin (A – r2) principal axis.
A On extending backwards, rays incident on
= 2 cos [sin A cos r2 – cos A sin r2]
2 pole meet the rays from focus on the straight
line always.
A
= sin A 4 cos2 1 – cos A
2
48. 8
45°
n (m 1)n F
sin C
n mn
n sin = (n–mn) sin 90°
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
44 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
WAVE OPTICS
1. A 7. C
In monochromatic light, only one wave length Given I1 = I & I2 = 4I
is present.
Imax . I1 I2
2
= 9I
2. C 2
4. B 9. C
2 D
x ;
d
2 1 106
7.692 10. A
5460 1010 10
5. B
Given y1 = A1 sin wt, f1 = 0
Wave front.
y2 = A2 cos (wt + f) = A2 sin t
2
f2 = +f
2
11. B
D f = f2 – f1
y 62 1D
62 y
x 1D d
2 2 d
Dx = × Df x 2D 62 1D 62 5893
2 4 67
d d 5461
Dx = 12. C
2 2
dy
x 2n 1
6. D 2 D
In interferene there should be two coherent
D
sources and propagation of waves should be y 2n 1
2d
simultaneously and in same direction.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Wave Optics | 45
13. A 18. B
D xd d.y
x D (2 1) t ( 1).2t
d L D
14. A d.y tD
t= y
D d
13
= 0.13
2 19. A
2 d.y 2
= m
100 =
D
D 1
S
y=
d
4
14
= I’ = 4I cos2 = 2I
13 /2 2 2
20. B
v
f=
8
3 10 100
f= = 1.5 × 1010 Hz
2 d
8d
d
15. C
d = ( – 1) A × 1
I’ = 4I cos2
2
2
8d .2
1 1 no. of fringes =
cos 2
= cos = D
2 4 2 2
17. D
S1
S
c.m. shift
S2 down
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
46 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
24. A 31. C
If unpolarised light is passed through a polariod
25. C P1, its intensity will become half.
2 1
= + (2t). So I1 = I with vibrations parallel to the
2 0
at top phase difference
axis of P1.
t 0 Now this light will pass through second
= polaroid P2 whose axis is inclined at an angle
o phase difference
Minima for all the of 30º to the axis of P1 and hence, vibrations
wave length. of I1. So in accordance with Malus law, the
Top position will intensity of light emerging from P2 will be
appear dark.
2
As we move down violet Maxima will appear 1 3
3
first. first colour will be violet. I2 = I1 cos 30º = 0
2
2 = 8 I0
2
26. A
2 3
By Theory
0 = 8 = 37.5 %
27. D
By Theory 32. D
28. B 33. B
29. A 34. C
Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true and
Statement-II is correct explanation of
Statement-I.
30. A
= .....(A)
a
x
= .....(B)
f
From eqs. (A) and (B)
Brewster angle is defined when reflected and
x f refracted rays are at 90°
= ,x= .....(C)
a f a
According to question x = ?, f = 40 cm
= 5896 × 10–8 cm
a = 0.5 × 10–1 cm .....(D)
From eqs. (C) and (D)
40 5896 10 8
x= 96 = 0.047 cm
5 10 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Wave Optics | 47
1. B 11. B
Wave nature
d
2 1 7
2. B
Principle of Superposition.
12. B
3. B n RD D
Given I1 : I2 = 100 : 1 (n 1) B
d d
I1 n. 7800 = (n + 1) 5200
= 10 : 1 n = 2.
I2
2 13. C
I max = I1 I2 = (10 + 1)2 = 121
C the fringe next to the central will be
2 red.
Imin = I1 I2 = (10 – 1)2 = 81
14. D
Imax
Imin = 121 : 81 x = (2n + 1)
2
4. D x = (1 + 3) – (2 + 4) = (2n + 1)
2
In coherent sources initial phase remains
constant.
15. C
4I0 = I
5. B
I0 = I/4
y1 = A1 sin3t, f1 = 0
16. C
y2 = A2 cos 3t
6 dy 2
D
y2 = A2 sin 3t , f2 = 1
2 6 2 6
2I = 4I cos2 cos =
2 2 2
D f = f2 – f1
d.y 2
3 4 2 .
2 4 D 2
2 6 6 6 3
3
1 10 y 1
1
y = 1.25 ×10–4 m
6. B 1 500 10 4
7. B 17. A
8. B d.d
n
6D
x n max ima
2
d
= [n = 1, 2, 3.....]
6nD
9. B
D 18. D
d
D
=
d
10. D
D = By using white light instead of single In water so
wavelength light.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
48 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
19. C 25. C
By Theory
2I = 4I cos2
2
26. B
1
cos = t 1.7 1 D t 1.4 1 D D
2 2 Shift S 5
d d d
=
2 4 t 8 10 3 mm 8 m
3
1 t 27. A
2 2
2 4
t = /2
20. C
As the D position of first maxima t 1.33
D 1.5
i.e., y d
First decrease then increase. 4
2× t 600
3
21. C t = 225 nm.
I0 = 4I
Intensity due to one
28. D
d.y 2
=
D 29. A
2 5
0.25 10 4 10 2
= 2
10 30. B
100 10 6000 10
= /3 31. C
3 3I0 32. D
I’ = I0 cos2 =
2 4 D/d
22. C 33. A
0.3 ×10–3 × sin30º = n × 500 × 10–9 By Defination
n = 300
299 + 299 + 1 = 599 34. A
23. D 35. A
2A( 1)
x
36. A
D
2 23
3 5890
20
x 5
tan = 28
D 2 & 2
30
24. D
By Theory
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Wave Optics | 49
1. BD
2 a ir
For coherent source x = 2 2 + x1 – x2
frequency same
constant phase difference x = 2 air + x1 – x2
3 > 2 > 1
air
2. BCD x1 = x2 =
2
The fringes next to central will be violet x = 2air = nair
and there will not be a complete dark Maxima at Interface (1)
fringe.
1 < 2 > 3
x1 = , x2 = 0
3. AD 2
air
(1) x = 2air + (2n 1)
2 2
Minima at (1) interface
2 =
(2) =t
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
50 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. 81:1 9. x = n
(1.7 –1).t –(1.4 –1)t = 5
2. Bright A, C and Dark B, D
5 4800 1010
A Maxima t
0.3
= 8 × 10–6 m
Minima
D B
D 3
10. 3I 4I cos2 , cos
C 2 2 2
A, C Bright 5 7
B, D Dark , ,
2 6 6 6
3. 60 dy 2 5 7
, ,
[ . R >>2a] D 3 3 6
:
D D 5 D 7
y . , , .
d 6 d
6 d 6
a 2a min.Dis tan ce
7 D 5 D D
Minimum Distance = =
3a = n n = 15 6 d 6 d 36
x = 15 Maxima 1. 600 109
14 + 14 + 14 + 14 + 4 = 60 = 2 104 m
3 103
4. 2t = n 11. x = dsin =
x
2 n ....(1) y
2500 d
d2y2 = 2(D2 + y2)
D y2
2
x'
2 (n 1) ....(2)
2500 103 1
y (d –l )= D = y =2 2 2 2 2 0.35m
(2) – (1) (32 1)106
2
x ' x
2500 x’ – x = 0.85 mm 12. Loyd’s mirror
fringwidth
D 600 109 1
120 {d=2mm} = 0.15 mm
no. of fringes = 141 2d 2 2 1 103
x'x
5. I
I = R2 = a12 + a22 + 2a1 a2 cos
Relative Trensity)
= I + 4I + 4I cos
I = 5I – 4I = I
13.
6. D
2 o 0.75 1 2 3
Imax . Amax .
=9
Imin . A min .
x =d sin = d. =
2
.D 600 109 1 520 103
d.0.75
7. 180 2
d 4 / 3 0.2 102
d = 1.98 × 10–2
= 0.225 mm
9D 3D
x 7.5 103
8. 12 = 600 D 14.
2d
1
d
15D
x 7.5 103 5000Å
18 2 400 D 2d
2 d
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Wave Optics | 51
1 1 1 20. 10-7 m
V 15 10
I1 A 21. d/6
0.5mm
d/2
2d
0.25mm –30cm d 3 x white spot
O O
S
0.25mm
15cm d 2d
0.5mm x= = d/6
2 3
I2
130cm
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
52 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
6900 1.33
equation is =
6 2 1
2. 1:1 6300
2
1.33
I f2 A2 63 1.33
= 0.63mm
I1
2
f1 A1
2 2 2 1.33 1 103
f 2a
I2 = f2 A2 = 2f a
1.58
(b) 1 t
1.33 2
1 4
= =1:1 6300 1.33 100
4 1 =1.575m
1.33 2 0.20
4 8. x = (–1)t
3. cos 1
d = (1.17–1)(1.5 ×10–7) = 0.255 × 10–7
P
Here path difference at Now for central maxima :
a point P on the circle dy 3 107
is given by x 0.255 × 10–7 = y
S1 d S2 D D
x = d cos ....(i) y = 0.085D
For maxima at P
x = n 9. When convex lens is introduced,
From equation (i) and (ii) v = 70 cm, u = – 30 cm
n 4 v h 7 0.7 cm
n = d cos = cos–1 = cos–1 i
d d u h0 3 h0
h0 = 0.3 cm i.e. d = 0.3 cm
2 x
4. D
0.0195 cm
d
2
= .x = 2 x (100cm)
/ .0195cm = 5850 Å
0.3cm
D 10. /4
5. 1 ...(1)
103
1 – 2 =3 × 10–5 ....(3)
denser
(1) – (2)
10–3( 1 – 2) = ×5×10–2
2ut t=
= 6000 Å 2 4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Wave Optics | 53
1. A 9. B
I0
Intersity of polorized light = I1 = 4I0 cos2
2 2
I0 I0 x=0 I1 = 4I0
Untransmitted light = I – =
2 2 2x x
x= = × =
y y 2
2. C
x I1 2
2
sin ay I2 = 4I0 cos2 = 2I0 I2 = 1
I Io and 4
D
For principal maximum y=0 10. D
=0 A1 = 2A2 Þ I1 = 4I2 = 4I0
Hence, intensity will remain same. 2 2
Imax = I1 I2 = I1 4I2 = 9I2
3. D = 9I0
By Theory
I = I1 + I2 I1 I2 cos
4. D
= I2 + 4I2 + 2 I2 4I2 cosf
2 6
= × = = 5I2 + 4I2 cos
3
Im
= (5 + 4 cos)
I = I0 cos2 = I0 cos2 9
2 6
Im
I 3 = [1 + 4 (cos)]
9
I0 = 4
Im 2
= 1 8 cos
5. C 9 2
31D 42D
= Þ 3l1 = 4l1 11. A
d d
Through A only component parallel to slit will
3 3 pass so intensity
2 = = × 590 A B 45º
4 1 4 after passing through A
= 442.5 nm I0
will be .
2
6. D
After passing through B
Initiancity of parallel beam is cylindrical
therefore the wave front will be planar. I0 I0
I= cos2 =
2 4
7. B
Both statements I and II are correct but 12. B
statement II does not explain statement I. Path differnce on the circle of radius R around
O on the wall will be same hence concentric
8. B circle.
Constant + source
I1 = 4I0 cos2 = 4I0 B
2
R
For incomepent source
I2 = I0 + I0 = 2I0 O
S1 d S2
I1
=2
I2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
54 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
13. B 18. C
IA cos2 30° = IB cos2 60° d = 0.5 mm, D = 150 cm
IA 2 (1 / 2) 2 1 = 650 nm & 2 = 520 nm
cos 60 1/4
n1 bright fringe n2 bright fringe coincide
IB = cos2 30 = ( 3 / 2)2 = 3 / 4 = 1/3
n1D1 n 2 D 2
14. D d
D 500 109 25 102 n1 1 = n2 2
y 1.22
d 2 0.25 10 2 n1 520 4
y 30m n 2 650 5
15. C n1D1 n D
y or y 2 2
d d
R
t
d/2 4 1500 650 10 6
R- t = = 7.8 mm
0.5
R d/2
19. D
2 I = I0 cos2
d
R2 = (R – t)2 + According to question
4
I I
d2 = (cos2 ) (cos2 )
R2 = R2 + t2 – 2 tR + (t2 is neglect) 8 2
4
I I
d2 d2 = cos4
2tR = R= 8 2
4 8t
1 1
36 cm2 120 cos4 = cos =
R= = = 15 cm 4 2
8 0.3 cm 8
= 45°
1 1
= ( – 1)
f R 20. B
1 1 1
= =
f 15 30
f = 30
16. B
We know that the fringe width in a 60°
diffraction pattern is given by ;
2D
w=
a
checking options
2L
a= L w = bmin = a sin =
L
a sin 30° =
2L 1m 1
bmin = = 2 L = a/2 = = × 10–6 m
L 2 2
= a = 2
4L
D
=
17. B d
Bends upwards
D 0.5 10 6 50 10 2
1 × 10–2 = =
d d
d = 25 m
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Wave Optics | 55
1. B 4. A
1 1 b
cos2 = cos =±
2 4 2 2 d
a
c
f
e h
g
7. A,B
I1 = 4I I2 = I Imax = 9I
Imin = I
(A) If d = only central one maxima
1 2 (B) < d < 2 one central and one more
sin C1
2 2 (C) I, I
1 Imax = 9I
sin or sin sin 45 Imin = 0
2
(D) 4I, 4I
> 45°
Imax = 16 I
For total internal reflection at face CD.
Imin = 0
3 3
sin sin C1 8. (A) (P,S) ; (B) (Q) ; (C) (T) ; (D) (RST)
2 2
or sin > sin60° or > 60° S1P0 = S2P0, S1P1 – S2P1 = ,
4
Therefore, for total internal reflection at both
the surfaces.
S1P2 – S2P2 =
min = 60°. 2
(A) (P0) = 0 (P) , I (P0) > I(P1) (S)
(B) (P1) = 0 (Q)
3. B (C) (P0) = I (P0) = 0
r = f tan I(P2) > I (P1)
or rf (D) (P1) = , I (P2) = 0 (R) , I (P0) > I
r2 f2 (P1) (S), I (P2) > I (P1) (T)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
56 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
9. C 14. 3
After Critical angle all the rays are Reflected
and so No transmition occurs. S1
x2 air
d d2
10. D
Fringe width
P 4/3 water
as (R > G > b) so R > G > B 2
d d
2 d
x
11. B
S2
2
I Imax cos ...(i) x = p2m22 – d2
2
2
4
Imax 1 x 2 d2 = m = 9. m2 2 – d2
Given, I ...(ii) 3
2
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have p2 = 9 ; p=3
3 5
, , 15. B,D
2 2 2
(b) Fringes will be semi–circular.
or path difference, x . d 0.6003 103
2 Now,
600 109
3 5 2n 1
x , , ..... d 1
4 4 4 4 103
2
12. D So, the region very close to O is dark.
2dsin = (d) Semi circular bright and dark fringes will be formed.
d= 16. B,D
2 sin
d cos = n
cos ec cos d n
dd = cos =
2 d
dd d. cot d ( d constant)
dd
d
dd = 3000th
S1 S2
dd
fraction
d
dd = absolute error
for n = 0
13. A,B,C = 90°
D As cos varies by same value, we can see
= 400 nm 1 = (400) that reperation between values of increases.
d
D
= 600 nm 2 = (600) 2>1
d
y
no. of fringes =
B
Angular separation :
D d 90°
Hence 1 2
D D
Checking (C) 3×600× = 9 × 400 ×
d 2d
D D At p2 d cos = n d = n
1800 = 1800
d d
The given option is true d
n= = 3000 (max order) bright frigne
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 57
ELECTROSTATICS PART-1
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
1. B 6. C
Charge is quantized Initially
q = ne, one quanta of charge is = 1e
2. A
Charge is independent of speed
L L
3. D
Electrostatics is the study of charge at rest.
Q Q
r = 8.94 × 10–2 m
If l >>>> x
2kqQ
Fnet = x 8. B
l3 Charge Q divided in two parts q & Q – q
Condition for oscillation.
Force between q & Q - q
5. D Kq(Q q)
q1 q2 F
r2
r For maximum force dF/dq = 0
Then
Kq1q2 dF K
F .........(1) [q(1) (Q q)1] 0
r2 dq r 2
q1 q2
q Q q 0
r/ 2
Kq1q2 Q 2q
F1 .........(2)
(r / 2)2
Q 2
From equation (1) & (2)
F1 = 4F q 1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
58 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
9. B 13. C
q Individual electric field at q place at origin
B
due to point A, B, C
a a
Kq(iˆ 2j ˆ
ˆ 3k)
EA 3
600 q Kq2 ( 14)
C F
q a A a2 ˆ)
Kq(ˆi ˆj k
0
60
EB 3
Kq2 ( 13)
F
a2
The net force on any charge say at point A.
EA
Fnet F 2 F 2 2F 2 cos 600 A )
2,3
Kq2 (1,
3F 3 q EB
a2
(0,0,0)
10. D (2 ,
C
2,2
Direction of arrow shows magnitude of force ) EC
and Net resultant force shows by R which is
perpendicular to the side AB. Kq(2 î 2 ĵ 2k̂ )
OR Ec
( 12 )3
Resultant R is to surface AB
B C I. Now E A .EB = 0 E A EB
+q –q
FOD
FOC II. E B 4 E C
R
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 59
Ep 2dE cos L L
2kdQ x T 2 g' 2
Ep 2 g2 (qE / m)2
x R 2 x 2 R 2
21. C
2kx KQ.x
Ep dQ ; Ep Higher Lower
x 2
R2
3 /2
(R2 x2 )3 / 2 potential (v1) potential (v2)
For x >>R
KQx KQ
U1 qV1 qE –q U2 = – qV2
(x2 )3 / 2 x2
Ep x 2 U1 < U2
17. A
22. B
Electric field is cancel out for diametrially m v m
opposite element, only removed diametrially Q Q
Initially
opposite element gives field.
E u m u m
kdq d finally
So E Q
d Q at closest
R2
distance
Q 1 from Energy conservation
E k d 2
2 R R 1 kq2
E 3
1 2
mv2 2 1 / 2 mu2
d
...(1)
R from Momentum conservation
dq
mv = 2mu u = v/2 ...(2)
from (1) and (2)
18. D
1 mv2 kq2
mv2
2 4 d
19. A 4kq2 1 4q2
d 2 = 4 mv 2
mv 0
23. D
-q -q
r Q r
–
Net potential energy of the given system
KqQ Kq2 KQqo
U
r 2r r
Given that U = 0
4k
2k 2kˆi
2k 2KqQ Kq2
R R R
E
R r 2r
Electric field along vertical direction cencle Q 1
each other, net field along horizontal direction. q 4
Enet 2 R î 24. B
0 y
20. D q
q
The net force on the sphere is a 2
2 2
F (mg) (qE ) q
x x
The effective gravity is
z q
F q
g' g2 (qE / m)2
m
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
60 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
32. A
Given q = 3 C, F = 3000 N, r = 1 cm = 0.01 m
-2q a -2q We know that
k V = Er
Ui = [(–2q)(–2q)+q(–2q)+q(–2q)] = 0
a V = 1000 × 1 × 10–2 = 10 Volt
k
Uf = [(–2q)(–2q)+q(–2q)+q(–2q)] = 0 33. C
2a q
W = Uf – Ui = 0
28. A
Potential energy at height h O
q q
= – (Work done by gravity + work done by
From figure net electric field at center = 0
electric field)
3 3 kq
= – (-mg – qE) h = (mg + qE) h and net potential at center = volt
a
The graph is a straight line passing though
E=0&V0
origin.
34. B
29. B
Given Q = 2 C, F = 100 N 35. B
A
We know that E = F/Q
100 3
E 50N / C m
2 2
B 1 1 C
m O m
2 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 61
Net potential at O r2 r1 r3 r2 t1 t 2
VO = VA + VB + VC r1r2 r2r3 r1 r3
k(6 106 ) k(2 106 ) k(3 106 ) since, r1 < r3, we get t1< t2
VO
3 /2 1/2 1/2
41. D
VO = 1.52 105 V From the figure, we can see that the distance
between two equipotential surfaces is
36. D d = 10 sin 30° = 5 cm
100 V 40 20
y=3+x E = 2 î ˆj E
d 5 102
400N / C
dv = –
100
2
î ĵ . dx î dyˆj 42. A
43. C
1 3 B
100 EB
=– dx dy
2 3 1
–q +q 2kp
v = 0 A EA
r2
37. D EA = – 2 EB
line of force
44. C
+q qE
E
qE -q
equipotential surface
Angle between both = 90°
If an electric dipole placed in uniform field. It
Experience a tarque and rotates.
38. D
Electric field is perpendicular to equipotential 45. C
surface Given that q = 1 × 10-6 c
d = 2 cm = 0.02 m
Slope of given line is m = 2.
E = 10×105 N/C
1 We know that
Slope of perpendicular is = –
2 = PE sin
Equation is x = -2y (if y = 4 then x = -8) P = qd
1 × 10-6 × 2 × 10-2 = 2×10-8
Now check option Ans - D
Maximum torque
39. C = PE = 2×10-8 × 1×105 = 2×10-3Nm
Integrate partially one of the term
46. B
v= 4a xy z dx const . We know that
x2 2KP KP
4ay z 2 = const. Eaxis ; E
r3 r3
const. Eaxis 2
z= E 1
x 4 y2
47. A
40. C
V 1 – V2 = V 2 – V 3
2q. 2 a q. 2 a
1 1 1 1
kq kq
r1 r2 r2 r3
q. 2 a
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
62 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
50. A
qE
2
2m
m
1
qE
net = qE 2sin +qE sin
= 3qE sin
net = 3qE
I = 3qE
3qE
= ...(1)
I
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 63
1. B 3. A
E1 E1 E2
Emax E2
4Q –Q
E (E1) (E2) P.E1
E2
x1 R/ 2 x2
6. B
q
2. B dF F a
dF = dqE –Q
2k a
dF = Rd
R q
x
2k d
dF Q Net force on –Q charge = 2F cos
R
dF 2F cos
a=
m
a
2kqQx
a 2 2
m(a x )
Due to symmetry
da x
Fnet = dF sin = 2kQ sin d for amax , 0
R dx
0 0
Q
F= a
2 0R which gives x
2
at x a=0
x0 a=0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
64 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
7. B qE qE
At equilibrium
m
f = mgsin
Net is also 0 Max. deacc. = –0.3 m/sec2
f So Vmax = 4+ 0.3 10
2qE sin R= f.R.
2 qE sin = mgR sin = 7 m/sec.
V min = 4 – 0.3 10
mg qE = 1 m/sec.
E=
2q 1V7
8. A 12. D
To calculate the electric field on z-axis, we
shall first consider two charges placed at the
r1 = (4m,7m,2m) r 2 = (1m,3m,2m)
opposite corners of the square.
-8 r
q=10
r r2 r1 3 î 4 ĵ
r 5 z
kq 90
V= = ....(1) q q
r2 r 5
kqr L/ 2 L/ 2
90 The electric field due to these two charges is
E = r 3 = 25 ....(2)
kq 2kqz
Deviding (1) & (2) cos 2
2
Z L /2 2 (z2 L2 / 2)3 / 2
r =5
The net electric field due to four charges is
V = 18 Volt
therefore,
9. B 4kqz
+q E
(z2 L2 / 2)3 / 2
P net E is zero at z = 0 and when z
p
To find location of Emax, we shall put dE/dz = 0
(2a,0) E1
KqQ E2
think !! x = 2a F
(a2+x2)
-q
x is not small (0,-a)
So F=-kx not x
P
satisfied so
excecute oscillatory
but not SHM.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 65
17. B 21. A
EQq EQq 1 2 KQ KQ
from E.C. = = + mv V or a
r 2r 2 4a 4V
kQq 1 2 Energy conservation
= mv
2r 2 between point P & A
Q P
KQq KQq 1 KQq
A
a 4a v
v mv 2
4v
mr 4a 2 a
kQqm
Impulse = mv = 1
r qV mv2 4qV
2
18. D
1 6qv
mv2 3qV v
v 2 m
q
h2 q 22. B
Movement is parallel to x-axis
Fe acom. = g
w.d. by 2 is zero.
h1
1m B A
19. C
y 2m
1
Q Q x (W.D.)AB E .dr
(–a/2,0,0) z (a/2,0,0) 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
66 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1
2k(3) 1 Ex = –E sin 100 5 1 / 5 = –100 Vm-1
= r
dr
= 3 2k ln
2
2 Ey E cos 100 5 × 2 / 5 200 Vm-1
= 3k ln 2
(W.D.) due to wire is kln (2)
28. D
n (2) dE
0 F= P
dr
kqx
23. C Electric field due to ring is E
3 /2
q q -q q
r 2
x2
dE R
q q -q +q and = 0 at r =
dr 2
dv F = 0
E =–
dx
29. A
24. D
-v 30. A
Ex = dp2=
x
dp2
check slope
25. A
dp1
KQ
A) V = 0 b/w z = 0
r
B) Depends on distribution of charge .
C) Depends on distribution of charge . –q
D) Fnet is zero but net may be non zero
26. B q 2q
in y, Ey = 0 = =
E R / 2 R
v
Ex = E0 = /2
x0 Ex
dP1= dPcos
0
+v
–v /2
= Rd R cos
0
27. C
/2
Y 2V /2
2
= R 2
E 4V
cos d = R
0
sin 0
d
2q 2 2qR
= R 2 .1 = .R
2
X R
Slope of equipotential surface is tan = 1/2
/2
sin = 1 / 5 and cos = 2 / 5 2qR
Electric field is the direction shown and is dP2 = dPsin =
0
given by
V 4 2 2
E 2 2qR
d 0.02 sin 0.02 1 / 5 100 5V / m
P=
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 67
31. B dx mg 1 1 2
.dx q mg 1 - mv
x
20
q 2 2 2
v 2g
v 2g ,
R
35. B
2 u
d = . xdx
2 0 v
R
l 2
l Sin
x.dx =
=
0 sin 0 20
Q 2
v2 m/sec.
P –q 3
R x
kQx
F -qE -q 2 2 3 /2
(R x )
36. D
E
kqQx kqQx T
If x << R then F = ma
R3 R 3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
68 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
By properties of charges
16Q 2 K
= 2
x 2
9 x
2. A,B,C 2(9–x) =x
Q –Q/4 18–2x =x
x r P x = 6 cm
A B
KQ KQ / 4 5. A,B,D
Vp = – =0
xr r Dimension theory
1 1
– =0 4r –x – r = 0 6. A,C
x r 4r
Fnet
x
r=
3
KQ / 4 KQ u
vp = + In constant force field path may be straight
r x r = 0 line
Fnet
1 1 x
+ =0 r= u or Parabola
4r x r 5
Q –Q/4 7. B,C,D
P To reduce potential energy
r
dU
KQ K Q / 4 F=–
dx
Ep = 2 – =0 ; r> 0
x r r2 F=0
4Q Q x 16Q
3. C,D
9cm
If we slightly displaced –Q charge towards B
16Q K 2 4Q2K
thus force on –Q due to B increses = 2
A Q x2 9 x
B 2(9–x) =x
a a +2q
+2q 18–2x =x
–Q moves towards BC (unstable x = 6 cm
equillibrium)
If we displaced to wards y axis 8. A,D
higher density Higher electric field
Fnet EA> EB
Electric field lines from higher potential to
(stable equilibrium) lower potential.
VB>VA
4. B,C
To reduce potential energy
9. A,C
dU Given VA = 3V, VB = 4V, q = -e
F=–
dx
F=0 3V 7V
4Q Q x 16Q A B
F = eE
9cm k.E. = e (7–3) = 4ev
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 69
E
10
60(V)× (m) = 6Vm
E 100
Q E Q For the second equipotential
E
20
Q 30(V)× (m) = 6 Vm
100
4KQ For the third equipotential
vc=
r 60
At Z axis horizontal component of E cancelled 10(V)× (m) = 6 Vm
100
but vertical is added.
We can understand that the product of
potential (V)
11. A,C
and radial distances (r) of equipotential lines
[as in figure] is equal to 6 Vm-1. hence, general
relation of potential (V) and radial distance
(r) can be written as
A C 6
B V Vm1
r
Since E = –(V)/(r) r̂ , substituting V = 6/r,,
It is clear from figure at point A and C Net we have
electric field is zero. And point B Net electric 6
field towards slide. E ˆ r Vm-1
r r
6
12. B,C,D or r Vm-1
E 2ˆ
Electric field is from high to low potential. r
i.e., along –ve x-axis.
b. Since E is directed in r̂ –direction and obeys
(a) is incorrect. inverse square law, E must be outward [as
The force on electron is towards right. Work shown in figure]
done by electric field in moving electron from The above E-field must be caused by a
B to C is positive. positive point charge.
(b) is correct.
V D – VC = V E – V D WCD=WDE 15. A,B,C
(c) is correct.
From E to A, the electron moves against the 16. B,C
electric force. So potential energy increases. F net = 2F sin
(d) is correct.
kqQ d
2.
13. A,C,D (r2 d2 ) (r2 d2 )1 / 2
A conductor has the same potential at all 2 kqQ KPQ
points. 3
r3 r
(a) is correct.
When a conductor is earthed, to make its
potential zero, the charge may flow from
conductor to earth or vice versa.
(b) is incorrect.
(c) and (d) are correct by properties of
conductor. r
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
70 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
x
dq = Rd
Q
For equilibrium net force at q will be zero. dq = R d
2R
K 4eq Kqe
x2 – x 2 kQ d
Q kdq
dq = d So E = 2 =
2 – x x 2 r 2R 2
x = /3
at equilibrium condition
If we move charge q slightly along line joining
4e and e then equilibrium will be stable. kQ d
2T sin d / 2
2R 2
d 4 Qq
3. , , d d
2 2 3 3 πε0d2 (for small angle sin )
2 2
QA qQ
r F T
d 82 0r2
x
F 5. 1
Q
B Let us cnsider a ball say P. There are three
Let at x distance per pendicular to AB force forces acting on it :
is maximum then
KQq T
Fnet = 2Fcos 2x cos (r2 = x2 + d2)
r2
2KQq P 60°
Fnet x F Q
d
x 2
2 3 /2
50cm
for Maximum Fnet
mg
dFnet
0
dx (i) Tension T in the thread
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 71
1 q2 1 q1q2
T cos 60° = Then F 4 d2 (ii)
40 r 2 0 r 1
6. 2 to q 5 15 cm of air or vacuum.
Therefore, effective separation is (10–5)+15
= 20 cm.
T
1 qq
F 1 22
40 d
P
F
(4 106 ) (10 106 )
9 109
(0.2)2
mg
9 109 40 1012
Initially, the forces actng on each ball are 9N
0.04
tension T, weight mg, and electric force F.
For the equilibrium of the spheres,
T cos = mg 8. 0
T sin = F E1 = 2Ecos
KQ
F E1 2
or tan = (i) x2 a2
mg
When the balls are suspended in a liquid of a
cos
density and dielectric cnstant K, the electric a2 x 2
F
force will become , while weight E
k
mg' = mg – V g (T h = V g) E1
E
or mg' = mg 1 (ii)
x
As = ', according to the question, equating
(i) and (ii), we get –Q a +Q
F F
mg
Kmg 1 120
o
o
120
o
1.6 120
K 2
1.6 0.8
or K = 2 Enet = 0.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
72 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
3/2
3 Y
9. – 3 × 10–9C
11
E
Kq r
E
r3
Electric field at (3,1,1) 13.
O z Z
K 10 9
3i j k KQ i j k
11 3
( 3)3
–9
10 C
q (2,0,0) x
14. 6
T cos + q B = mg
K 3 10 9 KQ T cos = mg – q B
EX i0 T sin = q A
11
3
3
3
3 /2
3
Q – 3 109 C qB
11 T
Y component is
qA
K 10 9 KQ
Ey
11
3 3 3
mg
2K 10 9 mg tan
Ey q 6 102 C
11 3
A+B tan
11. K/2qD
From energy conservation
12. 4d (K.E.)i + (P.E.)i = (K.E.)f + (P.E.)E
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 73
Qq q a=1m q
K
17. (a) 4 K (b) Kq2 Kq2 Kq2
0 m U1
From energy conservation a a a
kqQ 3Kq2
K.E ......(1) U1
R a
KqQ Q q Kq2 Kq2 kq2
R min R U2
K.E 40 K a /2 a a /2
5Kq2
U2
Rmin a
Nucleus 2Kq2
1 KQq Change in P.E.
K.E mv2 a
2 2R 2 9 10 9 (0.1)2
from eq. .....(1) = 18 × 107
1
KQq 1000 J Energy is supplied in 1 sec.
K
R 18 107
18 × 107
1 K.E 1000
K.E mv2
2 2 = 1.8 × 105 sec.
K.E
v kq2
m 20. – (3 – 2 )
a
Ist Case for calculation of P.E. make pair with
Q2 each and every charge make sure no pair is
18.
m 0 V 2 repeated.
U0 = U12 + U23 + U13 + U14 + U24 + U34
u Q Q
Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2 Kq2
m U0
a a 2a a 2a a
rmin
4Kq2 2Kq2 Kq2
from M.C. 2mu = mv
U0
a
2a
a
4 2
v
u q
2
1 1 KQ2
from E.C. mv 2 2 mv 2 2a
2 2 rmin
q q
1 mv 2 KQ 2
mv 2
2 4 rmin
q
Q2
rmin IInd Case
m 0 v 2
4Kq2 2Kq2
U
2a 2a
W.D. = –(U)
Kq2 Kq2 4Kq2 Kq2
2 2 2
a a a a
Kq2
a
3 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
74 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
4Kq2 3 1 4a
22.
21. (i) 3 3
a 2 3
Given that a is the
2Kq2 3 1 radius of disk, is the H
(ii) Wel 3 surface charge (m,q)
a 2 3 density and
q / m 40g / . The H
Kq2 3 1
(iii) 3 kinetic energy of the
2ma 2 3 particle, when it
reaches the disk, can O a
2Kq2 3 1 be taken as zero.
(iv) 3 Potential due to a
ma 2 3
charged disk at any
axial point situated at
Kq2 3 1 a distance x from O
(v) 3
ma 2 3 is
nU1 2
Total Energy = (n = no. of corner) V(x) a x 2 x
2 20
a
4kq2 3 1 and V(O)
Total energy 3 20
a 2 3
According to the law of conservation of
(W.D.)el = –(change in PE) = –(Uf – Ui)
(W.D.)el = energy, we have the loss of gravitation
potential energy is equal to the gain in
4kq2 3 3 1 4kq2 3 3 1 electric potential energy.
1 2a 2 2a 2 3a 1 a 2a 3a mg H = q V= q[V(0)-V(H)]
=
4kq2 3
1 2a
3
1
q a
(a 2
H2 ) H
2 (i)
2a 3a 0
We are given
2kq2 3 1
(ii) (W.D.)ext = 3
a 2 3
20 =2mg
(iii) from previous question
change in potential energy = Increase in K.E. Putting this in Eq. (i), we get
2
2kq 3 1 1 2 mg H = 2 mg[a–{ (a2 H2 ) H }]
3 (8m)v
a 2 3 2
or H = 2[a+H– (a2 H2 ) ]
Kq2 3 1
v (3
2ma 2 3 = 2a + 2H – 2 (a2 H2 )
1
(iv) mv2 q(VA V ) or 2 (a2 H2 ) =H+2a
2
4Kq or 4a2+4H2 = H2 + 4a2 + 4aH
1 3 1
mv2 q 3
or 3H2 = 4aH
2 a 2 3
4a
2kq2 3 1 or H=
v 3 3
a
2 3 (Since H = 0 is not valid)
(v) Similar to (vi)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 75
Second Method
23. x = a/ 3
+
The total potential energy of the particle at +
+
height x is + m
+
+ +q
q
U(x) = mgx+qV(x)=mgx+ 2 ( a2 x2 x ) +
0 +
+
+
+
= mgx + 2mg + (a x ) x
2 2
+
+
20cm 20cm
= mg 2 (a x ) x
2 2
(ii)
From qE = 100N
For equilibrium 2K
q 100N
0.20
U
dU Kq = 10
0
dx 2mga 2Kq 2Kq
Now F a
r rm
This gives 3mga
dv 2 10
x = a/ 3 v
dr (0.1)r
From Eq. (ii), graph
between U(x) and x X
O a/ 3 H=4a/3 v 0.40
can be plotted as 1
vdv 200 dr
shown in figure. r
0 0.20
v2 = 400 (n 2)
v 20 n2
24 0
2 2 0 2 0 7K K
2 0 A B 2 0 26. |E| = ,V= [where K = 1/4 0]
2 8 4
2 0
2 0
2 0 y
E net A
0
2
E net B
0
EA A
0 x
EB P1=1 E1
E2
2m
2 0 u 2m
25. z
q
2KP 2 1 K K
E1
r3 8 4
x2
1 KP 3K
2 E2 3
x1 E.dr 2 mv
x1
r 8
x2 7k
Enet
8
KP1 K
Potential at v A
r2 4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
76 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
kP
2qp
29. (– i – 2j )
27. 2 2y 3
4 0 r
KP
E1
o
2y 3
90o 45
2KP
E2
45o y3 2
P
E
KP
2y 3
î 2 ĵ
Potential at point B due to dipole
E1 (0,y)
kp cos 45o k p
vB
r2 2 r2 E2
2kpq
Joule
r2
30. (QL2/2m)1/.2
2KP0 Q KP0 Q
28. (i) (– i ) (ii) j Ey
r3 r3 (0,L)
6KP0P 3KP0P Ex
(iii) i (iv) ( ĵ )
r4 r4 Ey
KQ
E 2 Ex
r
Q 45
-q0 +q 0 (L,0)
r As ring move downward Ex Ey
Force on P0 due to Q is –ve x direction and so at point where qEy sin = qEx cos
dE 2KP0Q After wards ring com reach (L,0) easily
F P (automotic)
dr r3
2KP Q tan x / y x = y
0
F î x = y = L/2
r3
P0 Apply energy concervation between point A
P
q and B
-q0 q0 -q
1
mv2 qV
r 2
2KP V = E.dr
E (due to P)
r3 L /2 L /2
x2
L /2
y2
L /2
V xdx ydy
F P0
dE 6KP 6KPP0
P0 4 0 0 2 0 2 0
dr r r4 L L 2
L2 2
V
6KPP 8 8 4
0
F (î ) 1 L2
r4 2
mv q
2 4
P0 P
1/2
2qL2 qL2
r v 2
v =
4m 2m
KP q KP0 q 3KP0 q ˆ
F 0
r a 3
r a
3
ˆj
r4
j
3 P1P2
31.
2 0 x 4 , attaractive
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 77
2. q 8W tan 0x2 ,
a
D
2
q W tan Also from Figure (c), we get
or
40 (2x)2 2 2 2 a
OA AD asin60
or 2 3 3 3
q 8W tan 0x
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
78 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Therefore, we have
a 3 a
So, tan (as L >>a)
L2(a2 / 3) ( 3)L
a 3 q2
( 3)L mg 40a2 te me
tP mp
1/2
40a3mg As me<mp, so te<tp. Hence,
i.e., q
3L electron will take less time. i.e., the electron
wins the race.
-11q -1q 2
-10q -2q
30
º 1 2 1 eE
30º
E y at
-9q -3q 30º 2 2 m u
30º
-8q -4q 30º
-7q -6q -5q (6 kq / r 2 )
2
ye mp up
By symmetry or (i)
yP me ue
6kq 6kq 6kq 6kq
E 2 2 2 cos30º 2 2 cos 60º 2 2 cos 90º ( ˆi)
r r r r a. If up = ue, then
6kq
E 2 (1 3 1) ˆi
r
ye mp
4kq yp me
6. – i
R 2 As mp > me, so
dE 2dE cos ( î ) ye> yp. Hence, the deviation of the
k /2 k /2 electrron will be more.
E
R 2
0
cos R d
R 0
cos d
k /2 k
sin 0
R R ye
yp
eE eE 1 2 2
(i) ae m , aP m ;d 2 at ye mpup me me
e P
yp meue mp mp
2d 2md
t or t As me < mp, so ye < yp. Hence, the deviation
a eE
of proton will be more.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 79
= q k ( 4 0 ) a1/ 2 2
st
step I
10. 2.2×10-12C 3
E x 4
E 0 î
step IIIrd
E0
Incoming flux = (0 ) a 2 = 0
th
step IV
E0
Outgoing flux = (a ) a 2
q E0 Wfinal ui uf
a3
0 kq2 kq2 2 2
3 2 2 kq kq 0
0 E0 a r 3 r r 3 r
q
8.85 10 12 5 10 3 v
2
[10 2 ]3 13.
3
2 10
3
q 2.2 10 12 C ( Px )1 q1E x t mv
4
q1 3
Q1 R1 ( Px ) 2 q2 E x t mv
11. q2 4
Q 2 R2
3
k p y 1 mv and p y 2 mv
4
U
R
q dq
3
kq 2
k (Q q) 2 kq ( Q q) mv
4 q v
U 1 v
2 R1 2R 2 d mv q2 3
kq2 k ( Q q) 2 kq (Q q) ( p y )1 q1 E y t
2 R1 2R 2 d
( p x )2 q2 E y t
d R1
d R 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
80 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Ip 2 E0 R 2
15. R E0 i
2 E0 R 2
x = R sin ....(2)
and dF = dq E Ip
= E(Rd) × By (1) & (2)
d = dFx
2E0 R2 f R 2E0 R2
++
( I cm MR 2 ) 2 MR 2
+
+ y
+
+ f R E 0R 2
–– x
R –
x
f E 0R î
––
––
d = E0 × R2 sin d 3 p1p2
16. 40 x 4 , Repulsive
/ 2
2
= 2E0 R sin d
0
3 2Qp Q2 pQ
17. 3 (upward), U =
2
0a 2 20a 20a
[ cos ]0 / 2 2 E0 R 2 2E0 R 2
I CM 2E0 R 2 f R
2 E0 R 2 f R
...(1)
I CM
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 81
1. A
Suppose that a point B, where net electric q 1 1
field is zero due to the charges 8q and -2q. 2o R R 2
d2
3. D
+8q -2q
B
O
A
Electric field due to a charged conducting
x=a x=0 x=L
sheet of surface density is given by E =
o r
1 8q
EBO . î
4 o a2 +
+
+
1 2q +
+
EBA . î +
4 o (a L)2 +
+ F=QE
+ B
According to condition, +
+
+ mg
EBO EBA 0 +
+q -q tan
d2 d1
4. A
Since V2>V1 so electric field will point from
R R plate 2 to plate 1.
d The electron will experi- 0.1m
A B ence an electric force,
opposite to the direction
of electric field, and hence E
1 q q
= 4 , d1 R 2 d2 move towards the plate 2.
o R d1 use work-energy theorem
to find speed of electron
1 q q
when it strikes the plate
4o R ....(1)
R d2
2
2.
1 q q 1 2
Similarly, VB= 4
R
me v 2
o R d2
2
0 e(V2 V1 )
2
Potential difference, VA-VB Where v is the required speed.
1 q q q 9.11x10 31 2
1
q v 1.6x10 19 x20
4o R 4o R 2
R d2
2
R d2
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
82 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1 (10 3 )
5. C .
In a non-uniform electric field, the dipole may 4 o 2
experience both non-zero torque as well as
so, VA VB 0
translational force.
for example as shown in figure,
9. C
Electric field at a distance r from A is
F2
+q 1
F1 -q E= ×
2r2
dV = – Edr
a b l dr
Vc –VB = V = –
a
2 r2
F1 F2 as E is non-uniform.
Torque would also be non-zero. l 1 1
or V =
2 a a b
6. D
V V V 10. B
E î ĵ k̂
x y z Work done by conservative force does not
depend on the path. Electrostatic force is a
V d 20 conservative force.
Ex
x dx x2 4
11. D
40x W=QdV=Q(Vq-VP)
(x 4)2
2
=-100 x (1.6 x 10-19) x (-4-10)
= +100 x 1.6 x 10-19x 14
10
Ex at x 4m V / m = +2.24 x 10-16 J
9
and is along positive x-direction. 12. A
Three forces F41, F42 and F43 acting on Q as
7. D
shown resultant of F41+F43.
Direction of E reverses while magnitude
remains same and V remains unchanged. 2Feach
1 Qq
8. B 2
4 o d2
Potential at A due to charge at O
y Resultant on Q becomes zero
only when q charges are F47
( 2, 2 ) F41
q
of negative nature. Q
1 QxQ F43
B F4.2
X 4 o ( 2d)2
O (0,0) (2,0) Q q
3 dQ Q x Q
1 (10 ) 2 2
VA d 2d2
4 o OA
QxQ
1 (103 ) 2 xq
. 2
4 o ( 2 )2 ( 2 )2
Q
q
3 2 2
1 (10 )
. Q
4 o 2 or 2 2
q
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 83
16. D
At any instant,
T cos = mg ...(i)
x 2
ka
T sin = Fe = ...(ii)
x2
K.dq
E
dE sin ( ĵ) r 2
sin ( ĵ)
K qr
E d sin ( ĵ)
r r
2
K q q T T
sin (ˆj) (ˆj)
r2
0 22 or 2 Fe Fe
x
mg mg
14. C
From F.B.D. of sphere, using Lami’s theorem From Eqs. (i) and (ii)
F ka2
mg tan
= tan .....(i) x2
mg
When suspended in liquid, as remains same, mg x 2 x
q2 . .x tan
F' k 2l 2l
= tan ....(ii)
mg1 mg 3
d q2 x ...(iii)
2kl
Using (i) and (ii)
mg 2 dx
F F' F 2q 3 x
= 2kl dt
mg where, F’ = K
mg1 1/2
d mg 3 dq 3mg 2
2 x x v
2Kl dt 2Kl
F F'
= 1/2
mg mg 3
mgK1 q x
d
2kl
1
or K = =2 vx1 / 2 cons tan t
1
d v x 1 / 2
15. A
17. A
2kqQ 2k(q)Q
Ui
a 5a F F
q/2
1 2qQ 1
. 1
4 o a 5
y
Uf = 0 q q
1Q x
q q a a
5a Fnet 2F cos θ
2a
kq(q / 2) y
2 .
(a2 y2 ) (a2 y2 )1 / 2
-q 2a -q
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
84 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-1 | 85
5. D
m = 4/3 r3
q = mg 6rv = mg
6. 3
L
2kq2 kq2
2Ta = + 2 2 cos 45
2 2a
a
2Ta
45° 45°
kq2 kq
2
kq
2
kq
2
Can be simplified to
2
2a a
2
a
2 2a
2
kq2 1
Ta = 1
a2 2 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
86 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
2q 12. B
KQ 1
(i) E E 2
60° d2 d
4q
60° = 6q E (ii) Electric field due to dipole
2q 2kp
E 1 3cos 2
d3
k(6q) 1 6q
E 2 = 4 L2 = 6 K
L 0 1
E for dipole
At O there are equidistant +ve & – ve charges. d3
Hence v = 0. At PR also +ve & – ve charges (iii) For line charge
are same and equidistant, so V = 0 at all
points. But at ST potential is +ve on left of 2k
E
O & – ve on right of O. d
11. A 1
E
d
2k 2K
(iv) E –
d – d
d – d
2K
d –
2 2
(P) All +ve
2K 2
E
(Q) Q1, Q2 +ve 2
d 2 1 – 2
d
1
E
d2
(v) Electric field due to thin sheet
Q3, Q4 –ve
E
2 0 ( independent of v)
Q2, Q3 –ve
Q2, Q4 –ve
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 87
ELECTROSTATICS PART-2
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
1. C 11. C
E depends on distribution of charge but
doesn't depend on distribution qin. q in
2. C Electric flux E.dS
S 0
q in is the charge
Gauss law is valid for all distribution either
symmetric or not. enclosed by the Gaussian-surface which, in
3. B the present case, is the surface of given
y ^
E = eE0x i sphere. As shown, length AB of the line lies
inside the sphere.
E
E x
B
z
Incoming flux in = E0 (0) = 0
Out going flux out = E0 (a2) O' y
O
q q R
net = out – in = A
0 0
q = 0 E0 a2
(y < R)
4. C
Area lying in X, Y plane means A = A k̂ In OO’A R2 = y2 + (O’A)2
A 100 k̂ , E î 2 ĵ 3 k̂
O’A = R 2 y2
= E A
= i 2 j 3 k 100k and AB = 2 R 2 y 2
= 100 3 = 173.2
5. D Charge on length AB = 2 R 2 y 2 ×
Incoming flux = Outgoing flux
6. C
2 R 2 y 2
Flux
q electric flux =
S
E.dS
0
0
q = a2dx
q = a2 dx dx 12. C
2
= a (area under curve) When the two conducting spheres are
0 0 0 connected by a conducting wire, charge will
q = a2 8 2
8
flow from one sphere (having higher potential)
to other (having lower potential) till both
3 2 acquire the same potential.
q= a 0
4 Therefore
3 / 4a2 0 3 V
= = E
0 4 r
7. A E1 r1 2
2 :1
E2 r2 1
E ds , R 2E
8. D
qin= 0 13. B
=0 From symmetry flux through each point of
9. B the sphere is same.
q
10. A Flux through whole sphere =
o
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
88 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
15. D
R
q q 5q
q
6 0 24 0 240
16. C
1 The magnitude of electric field intensity due
Total surface area = 4R 2 4 4 m2 to each part of the hemisphorical surface
at the centre 'O' is same. Suppose, It is
flux through 0.2 m2 is E.
q / o q E E
= 0.2 E+ + = E0
4 20 o 2 2
2E = E0 30° 30°
(B) E E
2 2
E0 E
14. A E E
Flux through the cube is maximum when the 2
charge inside it is maximum.
17. D
h
E =0
b q
l
18. C
Charge associated with wire Q l qin
E • dA 0
Q is maximum when l is maximum.
E due to charge inside or outside charge.
So for maximum flux wire should be placed
along the diagonal of cuboid. 19. D
Radius of the cutting
R
Length of diagonal = L2 B 2 H 2 disc = R 2 x 2
charge on disc x
q = A
Q max L2 B 2 H 2 q = (R2 – x2)
max (1)
o o q (R 2 x2 )
Now = =
0 0
Similarly for minimum flux the wire should be
20. B
placed along height (h).
qin q2 q3
h<b<l
o
o = - 36 103
Qmin h 21. A
min (2)
o o Charge revolve only due to electric field of
inner shell.
From (1) and (2) 2k q
= q, v= 2 0m
r
max l 2 b2 h2
min h 22. A
In a conductor given charge is distributed
(A)
uniformly on the outer surface of sphere
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 89
24. A
29. D
Remain in the car, which provide electrostatic
Let the spherical conductors B and C have
shielding. As we know that effect of external same charge as q. The electric force between
electric field inside conductor is zero. them is
1 q2
F
25. B 4 o r 2
F1 = F2 (inside Conductor E = 0) Here r, being the distance between them.
When third uncharged conductor A is brought
k qd (qb + qc ) in contact with B,then charge on each
F3 =
r2 conductor
F1 F2 F3 qA qB 0q q
qA qB
2 2 2
26. C When this conductor A is now brought in
The dotted lines may be surface boundary of contanct with C, then charge on each
conductor
a conductor. Electric lines of force do not
enter a conductor. Potential of a conductor qA qC (q / 2) q 3q
qA qC
is constant but not necessarily zero. 2 2 4
Here, electric force acting between B and C
It may be zero also. So, Point P may be inside
is
a conductor (solid or hollow).
1 qB qC 1 (q / 2)(3q / 4)
F'
4o r2 4 o r2
27. A
The distribution of charge on the outer 3 1 q2 3F
surface, depends only on the charges 8 4 o r 2 8
outside, and it distributes itself such that
30. D
the net electric field inside the outer surface
due to the charge on outer surface and all 31. A
the outer charges is zero. Similarly the KQ
distribution of charge on the inner surface, V' V
a
depends only on the charges inside the inner
volume = 4a 2 t a
surface, and it distributes itself such that t
Now bubble of radius R then
the net, electric field outside the inner
kQ
surface due to the charge on inner surface V' '
R
and all the inner charges is zero.
Also the force on charge inside the cavity is 4
Volume is const. R 3 4 a 3 t
3
due to the charge on the inner surface. Hence
1/3
answer is option (A). Va a
R = (3a2t)1/3 V '' V
(3a2 t)1 / 3 3t
28. C
At p due to shell, potential
q
P
V1
4 oR R/2 q R
At P due to Q, potential RO
Q
V2 2Q
R
4o 4 oR
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
90 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
32. C 37. A
Electrostatic shielding.
q1 So VA – VB doesn't change.
38. C
From concept of uniformly charged solid
q sphere
3 kQ
VC =
2 R
Potential at distance r is V
The net potential on the surface of earthed Vc
conductor is zero. Now V =
2
q1 q kQ 3 kQ 4R
V = 4 r 4 d 0 = r=
0 0 r 4 R 3
4R R
q1 q Distance from surface = R =
– 3 3
4 0 r 4 0d
39. A
40µC 20µC
qr
q1 = –
d
33. B
k(40)(20)
+Q F1 =
–Q d2
+Q –q After touching the charge on sphere = 10µC
–Q Will force
aQ 10µC 10µC
k(10)(10)
b F2 =
d2
From distribution of charge
F1 : F2 = 8 : 1
Charge on inner surface of outer shell = –Q
and outer surface = Q – q 40. D
Radius of single drop = r
34. D 4
Potential at every point inside then total volume = n r3
3
= potential at surface Now radius of big drop = R
k(Q q) 4
VS = Volume = R3
b 3
4 4
n r3 = R3
35. B 3 3
v = const.
R = n1/3r .... (i)
rV
k
Q
Charge on single drop q =
= 10V vin = 10V K
R
m
5c
nrV
Total charge = nq =
k
Final potential of big drop
36. C knq knrV
– + Vfinal = = = n2/3 V
– R kn1/3r
+
+ ++ – C +
++
+ –– 41. D
++ ++ Use above formula in Q.26
V' = n2/3 V
= (1000)2/3 (1)
V' = 100 V
VC = +VC (due to charge body)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 91
42. A 47. D
As we connect A and B through wire with C.
43. A Then all the charge on A and B move towards
From notes electric + + C so qA = 0, qB = 0
+
field in a cavity 3 + + + qC = Q + q1 + q2
c/m +
+ 48. D
+
E = 3
0 + + It is clear from figure q' charge given to earth
+ +
q + + + surface and also Vc = 0
F = qE = + + b = 2a, c = 3a, d = 4a
30
kq kq kq'
44. A Vc = 0
3a 4a 3a
Given potential at A is 5V
q
10V and potential at B is 10V q' =–
5V Now potential at 4
a
centre is 10V because kq kq kq'
b Now vA =
in hollow sphere 2a 4a 3a
potential is constant kq
from centre of surface. VA =
6a
45. B –q
q1 –q2
R q q'
R
a
r = 0.5 m b
kq1q2 c
Given = 0.108 .... (i)
r2
d
Now after connecting through a conducting
wire the final charge gets half
q1 q2 q1 q2 kq kq
V A – VC = –0=
2 2 6a 6a
49. C
Electric field lines enter and exit perpendicular
r = 0.5m to the conductor body.
k(q1 q2 )2
Given = 0.036 .... (2) 50. D
4r 2
After solving equation (1) & (2) will get the dV
answer. E=
2 0 x 2 0 3a x = dx
46. C dx dx
Potential of shell A is dV 2 x 3a x
kQ A kQB kQC 0
= + + ...(i)
a b c
Now QA = –4a2 =
2 0
ln x2a a ln 3a x 2a a
QB = 4b2
C
B
A –
+
–
a
C
b
= ln 2 ln 2 = ·2 ln 2 = VA– VB
QC = –4c2 2 0 2 0
1
k= q0 ln 2
40 work = (VA – VB) q0 =
Put QA, QB, QC and k in equation (i) 0
VA = b a c
0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
92 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
2. D
Since field is uniform, the net flux for the a a a
closed surface is zero.
(A) (B) (C)
(D)
In case the string is kept parallel to the
3. B diagonal of a face, as shown in Fig. (B), the
length of string inside will be
Qenc
From Gauss’s law E
0 a2 a2 2 a
6. D 7. C
As per Gauss’ law, the total flux through a Electric field at any point on the surface of
closed surface equals the net charge Gaussian surface is due to enclosed charge
as well as charge placed outside it.
enclosed by the surface divided by e0,
q in 8. A
4 xˆi 6 yˆj
If the string is kept parallel to one edge, as
qin
shown in the length of string inside the cube .dA 4 6 2
0
will be a. So,
qin 20
qin = la
= 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 93
9. B 17. B
1 2 1 cos 60 = 1 1
E times
r2 4
2 2(1 cos 90) = 2
q1 18. D
Flux from q1 = 4
0
q2 kq
v1
Flux from q2 = 2 r1 v1 r2
0
kq v = r
Outward = inward v2 2 2 1
r
q1 2
q2 1
19. D
V' = (n)–2/3V
10. A
20. B
11. A
= E. ds Conversion of volume
= EdS × cos 4 3 4
= 20 × 8 × cos 60° = 80 8 r R 3
3 3
12. A 1
R r 8 3
2r
Since qen = 0; =0
Conversion of charge
Q = 8q
13. C
Electric flux due to outside charge will be kq KQ K 8q
zero. But elecric field will be due to all the Vi ; Vf
r R 2r
charges.
4kq
14. D Vf
r
KQr
E= Vf = 4 v i
R3
15. D 21. B
23. D
Charge on inner surface of outer shell = –2Q
+Q +++
++ +
Enet = 0
+
16. C
+ ++
v=0 Q
–Q
k3Q
Electric field at point P = +
r2 + ++
–Q 24. D
b 3Q
P
a
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
94 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
25. C +q 28. A
Balancing occur only when –ve charge occur
–q in inside conductor.
a q
F
++
b ++ +
+
F
++++
+
– – –
++++
(W.D.)ext = Uf – Ui
–––
––
Ui = 0 (at )
–
––
kQ2
+
Self energy of a conducting sphere = +
2R ++ ++
+
kq2 kq2 kq2 kq2
Uf = – W.D. = –
2b 2a 2b 2a 2
Pelec. =
20
26. A
In the charge reach at point B then it will
automatically reach at point C. 2
F= A
2 0
A B C
R/2 at equilibrium
2
+Q 2 2
4 R
(4R2) = 4
20 20
Energy Conservation between A & B
1 ' = 2 (–ve)
qvA + mv2 = qvB
2
2
kQ 2 R 11kQ 29. D
VB = 3R
2R 3 4 = 8R
1 11kQ kQ +Q –3Q
Now mv2 = q
2 8R R R R
6kQ A B
v= ...(i)
8Rm
KQ kQ kQ 3
4 1 EB = 2 Enet = EA EB =
Now put Q = × R3 and k = 4 r r2 r2
3 0
4 4
Put value of Q and k in equation (i) we get
R 2 30. A
v=
4m 0
Kq RV
V= ;q=
27. B R K
A Kq K RV RV
R r E= = = 2
r2 Kr 2 r
C d
d cos = r
kp kp cos 2
vA = vC = 2 =
d r2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 95
31. B 33. A
Q Q
10d – d/2
R R 10d
kqQ
Net force on charge q =
(10d d / 2)2
Kq 4Kq qQ
E= = 2
(r / 2)2 r 361 0 d2
32. B
v
35. B
r1 r2 Vcos
+ + + +
E1 = E2 u
E
– – – –
2 u cos
Kq1 Kq2 q1 r1
2 = 2 or q = Since, No force acts along horizontal
r1 r2 2 r2
direction.
2 Horizontal comp. of velocity remains same,
V1 Kq1 r2 r1 r2
V2 = Kq2 × r1 = r2 × r u cos = V cos
1
u cos
V1 r1 V=
cos
V2 = r2
mu2
K.Ei 2 u2
K.Ef = 1 = 2
mv 2 2 cos
2 u
cos2
2
K.Ei cos
=
K.Ef cos
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
96 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. A,B,C 12. AC
E = 100 r qin = 0
q
E . dA in E A Circle is perpendicular
0
qin bisector to dipole.
EdA cos 180° = –q +q
0
qin = –ve
|qin| = EdA 0 = 3 × 10–13 C
2. A,B,C
qin
Q2
E . dA 0 Q1 13. A,C,D
Flux electric 100V 75V
field due to A B
charge lie inside R 5cm
or out side the surface. But is only due to R + 10
charge lie inside the surface.
kQ
Given 100 = ..... (1)
3. A, C R 0.05
kQ
4. ABCD 75 = ..... (2)
Gauss law R 0.10
from (1) & (2) R = 10 cm
5. A,D 5
Flux due to charge which is outside will be zero. Q= × 10–9 C
q 3
. dA in
0 KQ
electric field due to all the charges.
Again VS = = 150 V
R
6. A,B 3 kQ
In conductor given charge inside is spread VC = = 225 V
2 R
its outer surface
1 kQ
r Potential will be same E= = 1500 V/m
c R2
Electric field near the surface = 14. A,C,D
0
Where = Local charge density 2Q
+Q+Q=2Q =
1
4R 2
r
Q
7. ABC Q A =
Charge is distributed over the surface of B 2R 2
conductor in such a way that net field due
to this charge and outside charge q is zero 1
EA only due to inside charge
inside. Field due to only q is non-zero. r2
EB due to charge (inside + outside)
8. BC
+
+ ++
10. A,B,C A
+
+ ++
11. C,D
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 97
R
3. a= 6. 40 V-m
3 3
E = 2 × 10 k̂
a = E. ds
cos =
R a2
2
= 2 × 103 k̂ .0 × 20 × 10–4 × k̂
So solid angle = 2 (1 – cos ) = 4 × 10 = 40 V – m
a
= 2 1 7. /2
2 2
a R
q
Let flux from 4 solid angle = =
then from flux in 0
a q
2 1
= (Halved) (halved)
4 a R 2 2
a
=
Now given 2 1 2 2
4 a R 4 8. 3 /0
3a2 = R2
qmax 3
R max = 0 = 0
4. 2 0
+
+ 9. q / 20
+
+ x dx
10. q / 20
+ R
dx 11. E
Flux passing through the area 2 × dx
Kq 1 q
k E=
= (2 × dx) 2 = 4 × 2
x R 0 R
R
Now compute flux = 2k dx E= E
0 0
R
= 2kR = 2 Since = const.
0
E = const.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
98 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Q
17. 4 0 R
EP = 0 Applying generator principle, total charge of
inner conductor transfers to outer one on
x Qx
Q
2A0 + E = 2A0 connection and hence VB = 4 R
0
x Q
A = 2A – E
0 0
18. –2C
Q Q
x= – EA0 and Q – x = + EA0 Kq kq1
2 2 Potential at the inner sphere, V = +
3r r
Q
So charge on one side is – EA0 and other
2 q
Q
side + EA0 q1
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 99
q kqQ mR 3
Now, V = 0 q1 = = –2C F qE x, T 2
3 R3 KQq
kqQ
ma = 3 x
q Qq R
19. (Non Uniform), (Uniform) kqQ
4R12 4R 22 =
+ + mR 3
+ 1 kqQ
+ Q+q n=
+
+ 2 mR 3
+ – – ––
–q –
– q – +
+ – 23. 9V0
– –
– – Let us assume radius of smaller drop is r and
+ – – –– +
bigger drop is R.
+ + 4 3 4
+ + + 27 r = R3
3 3
Due to induction, –q will induce on inner R = 3r ....(1)
surface of shell. As the total charge of shell is kq V0r
Now = V0 q 0 =
Q so charge on outer surface in electrostatic r k
27V0r
equilibrium condition is Q + q. Total charge Q = 27q0 =
k
The charge distribution on inner surface of shell
kQ
would be NU, because electric field at any Now potential of bigger drop V =
R
outside point, (r > R1) due to inside charges k 27V0r
V= = 9V0
(q & –q) has to be zero which is possible only 3r k
when –q is distributed non - uniformly. r1
24. (i) r q
2
q2 1 1
20. A r
8 a b (ii) Charge on inner shell = – 1 q and
0 r2
charge on the outer shell = q
Q r
21. 2 0 (iii) Charge flown in to the earth = 1 q
r2
q + q'
–q'
q'
/2
r1
r2
Flux minimum when length minimum.
half length of rod inside the cube so it contain
we know that potential of grounded sphere
Q/2 charge
is zero.
qin Q Potential of inner sphere = 0
= = 2
0 0 q' charge redistribute exact distribution shown
in figure
1 qQ kq kq' r1
22. 2 4 0mR 3
r2 + r1 = 0 , q' = –q r2
+++ (i) charge on inner surface of outer shell =
+++++
r
+++ + q 1
r2
x
+++ ++
++++
r
kQr (ii) charge on inner shall = – q 1
EF inside the sphere = r2
R3
r
force at distance x from centre is (iii) charge flow into the earth = – q 1
r2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
100 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
kq kq1 b kq1
25. v VQ = –
r r a r
+q aV
27.
b
O –q
q Let charge on inner conductor is Q, then V =
P
Q
K . Using generator principle, the entire
a
charge Q transfers to outer sphere, then
kq kq kq kq potential of outer sphere is given by,
VP = – + , VP =
r r r r Q Va
V’ = k =
b b
b
26. (i) q2 – q1 ; (ii)
a
28. 1.125 q
q1 1 1 Spheres are identical then after touching
Vr – ; ar b
charge on each sphere is same.
4 0 r a
q 1 1 6q 3q 3q
Vb 1 – ; r b Ist A & B then q1 = =
4 0 b a 2 2
nd
3q / 2 0 3q
II A & C then q2 = =
Vr 1 q1 q2 ; r b 2 4
4 0 r r 3 q / 4 3q / 2 9
IIIrd C & B then q3 = = q
2 8
Charge given = Q
Q + q1 29. zero
–q1
q1 b q1
q1 a
–q 1
a P
r
b r
Q
bq
k q1 1
kq1 kq1 a
VP = – +
r b b
kq1 kq1
VP = –
r a
b
k q1 q1
kq1 kq1 a
VQ = – +
r r r
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 101
1. 2 5. 105 NC–1 m2
When net electric field is zero. Electric field strength at a point in plane of
Kq a K(2 / 5) qa 3 / 2 ring depends upon its distance from centre
of the ring. Magnitude of electric field is same
(a a2 )3 / 2
2
(b2 a2 )3 / 2
at all those points which are equidistant from
1 1 the centre and co-planer with the ring.
= Therefore, consider a coplanar and concentric
(2a2 )3 / 2 2
3/2
2 2 3 /2
5 (b a ) ring of radius x and radial thickness dx as
shown in Fig.
1 53 / 2 E
2 3 /2 3
a 3 /2
2 (b2 a2 )3 / 2 r
x
q
(b2 + a2)3/2 = 53/2 a3 R
b2 + a2 = 5a2
b = 2a
a
Inclination of
E with the normal to surface
4. 40aR.
of the ring
In accordance with the Gauss theorem, the
a
required charge is equal to the flux of E considered is given by cos =
r
through this sphere, divided by 0. In our case,
Flux passing through this ring is
we can determine the flux as follows. Since
the field E is axisymmetric (as the field of a d =
E dS
uniformly charged filament), we arrive at the or d = E dS cos
conclusion that the flux through the sphere
1 q a
of radius R is equal to the flux through the = 4 (2x dx)
2 2
2 2
0 (a x ) a x
lateral surface of a cylinder having the same
radius and the height 2R, and arranged as Hence, total flux passing through the given
shown in Fig. Then ring is
x R aq x dx qa 1 1
q = 0 E dS = 0
ErS,
= x 0 2 2 2 3/ 2
0 (a x )
= 2 0 a
a R2
2
where Er = a/R and S = 2R•2R = 4R2.
= 105 NC–1 m2 Ans.
Finally, we get
q = 40aR.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
102 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
2K 1000 e
6. 0, ,0 v (velocity of one electron)
r m
for r < a
q ne ne
qin Given i
t=
E.ds
0
t t i
Now Impulse = change in momentum
F.t = n mv
a nmv nm i 1000 e
b F= =
t ne m
Gaussian surface of F = 7.5 × 10–9 N.
radius r < a
Qq
qin = 0 8. 2 0 L
E=0
dq = 2 r dx
for b > r > a
K2rdx
dv
E.ds qin 0 (r 2 x 2 )1/ 2
l r R xR
2r.E r
0 x n h
cb / m
Gaussian surface of L
radius r < a R dx
r
r x
– cb / m
h
2k
E
r
K 2 xRdx 2 KRdx
(small part of length l of long cyclinder) dv dv
for r > b x R2 2
1/ 2 (R 2 h 2 )1/ 2
n 2 x 2
cb / m n
Gaussian after integration
surface
2 KRL
v
r (R2 h2 )1/2
– cb / m
Q
& R2 + h2 = L2
R(R h 2 )1/ 2
qin = 0 (because equal & opposite charge on
Q
cyclinder) v
E=0 2 0L
qQ
7. 7.5 × 10–9 N So now energy required = qv = 2 L
0
v 500
E= =
d d
qE 500e 9. [3, 19.6 ms–2 downward, 5.7 × 10–5 ms–1.]
a=
m dm
from v – u2 = 2ad
2
10. [10(1/4)1/3 cm]
1000e
v2
m
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 103
1/ 2
2KQq r – R 3 6 2mr 0
11. 13.
mR r 8 ea
kQ kQ R r a e a
vA – vB = – = kQ F e ae
r R rR 3 0 3 0 m
kQ d 2r
vC – vB = (R 2 r 2 )
2R 3 1
{in derivation} from d = ae t 2
2
kQ 2 R 2 3kQ
vC vB R F=qE
2R 3 4 8R d Cavity
conservation of energy r r e
45°
1 2
Now q(vc – vA) = mv
2
3kQ kQ(R r ) 1 2
q 2 mv
8R rR
1/ 2 1 ea 2
2qkQ r R 3 2r t
v 2 3 0m
mR r 8
6 2 r 0 m
12. Proof t
e a
r
(a) dq = (4 r2 dr) 0
R
3
Q R
r a b
2
14. (r a)
(1) 3 ,(2)a. 3 r r a
0 0
dq 4r dr 0
R 0
0
r
0 3 3
R R b
(r a)
b. 3 r r r a
dr
0
r (i) The electric field within the cavity or outside
is the superposition of the electric field due
to the original uncut sphere, plus the electric
R field due to a sphere of the size of the cavity
R
but with a uniform negative charge density.
40 3 4 the effective charge distribution is composed
r dr Q 40 . R = R3...(1)
Q
R 0 R 4 0 of a uniformly charged sphere of radius R,
charge density , superposed on it is a charge
density – filling the cavity. An electric field
qin
(b) E.ds 0
is E1 is caused by the charge distribution +
qin r
at a point r inside the spherical cavity..
2 0r 0 r 4
dq (4r dr ) R
0
in
0
qin =
R
Gaussian P
surface s E1
r O' E2
r
a
P P P
s s
r
O r
a
0 r 4 0 r 2 O O O
E(4r2) = E ...(2)
R 0 4R0
from eq. (1) and (2)
k Qr 2
E
R4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
104 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
4 3
b (r a)
1 q(s) 3
E2 3 Section D - Plates
40 s3 40 r a
The resultant electric field is
15. 3Q and 4Q
b
3
E E1 E2 r (r a)
30 r a
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 105
dq dq dr (24 ar 2 ) 1 B
x o 2
= -6 a c
dV dr dV 4r 0
b
6. A
Statement I is dimensionally wrong while from Writing potential at B
Gauss' law, K4a2 K4b2 () K4c2.
4 VB = + +
. r3 r b b c
2
E(4r ) 3 E
o 3 o a2 b2
= b c
gives statement II is correct. 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
106 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. C 4. A
/ 2 0
+ –+ +–+
/ 2 0 + –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
2 –+
2 / 2 0 E net + +–+
0 + –+ +–+
+ –+ +–+
KQ + –+ +–+
2. V' V = potential of bubble ....(1)
a
kQ=Va Potential difference occur when charge is
volume of bubble = 4 a 2 t given to inner cylinder.
bubble 5. D
+ + + +
a
t q
drop
Net charge on sphere = 0
R
6. B
kQ
potential of drop = V' ' .....(2)
R
4 3 3
Volume is const. so R 4 a t
3
R = (3a2t)1/3
Put R and kQ from above into equation (2)
1/3
Va a
V '' V E
(3a2 t)1 / 3 3t 3 0
3. A,B,C,D 7. B
for practical purposes earthing part of
electrical curcuit have zero potential
+ + + +
+
+
+ + +
v=const
+ ++
kq/r=V
r
+
+
+ + +
O a R r
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 107
R Q3
then 5 ...(2)
Q1
kZe from (1) & (2)
electric field at distance r = Q1 : Q2 : Q3 = 1 : 3 : 5
r2
12. 2
K(Ze)
E.F at surface = (independent of a) Given = Kra
R2
r
4kr 3 a
qin = k 4 x 2 a dx
9. B
for a = 0
0
3a
qin
(r) = –
d r
d dq = 4r2 (r) dr
Now E.ds 0
R
R R
d
Q 4 r 2 (r ) dr 4 r2 r d dr
0
0 R
dx
x
(r )
d
R
r 4 kr 3 a kra1
E(4r2) = , E
0 (3 a) 0 (3 a)
O R r dr
According to given condition
R 3 R
dr 1 k R a 1 k R a 1
dr 4 dr 2 dr Ze
4
0
R 0
8 0 (3 a) 0 (3 a)2a 1
2a + 1 = 8 a=2
dR 3 dR 3 3Ze
4 Ze = d
4 3 R 3 13. A
10. C qin
=
r 0
In a non-conductor if is uniform then E
30 qin =charge on half disc + charge of point
We make the nucleus uniformly charge
distributed then a = R in which = d (uniform) a a
, , 0
We make the nucleus uniformly charge 4 4
distributed then a = R in which = d (uniform)
+ charge of rod in the cubical surface
11. B
Q1 Q 2 Q1 Q Q1 Q 3 6 8 a a
2 ( 7) = – 2C =
4R 2 16 R 2 36 R 2 2 5a a 2 4
4 4
4Q1 Q 2 Q1 –2C
from I, II 1 1
Q2 Q1 4Q1 0
Q2 14. A
3 ...(1)
Q1 2 2R 2
F = Pelec. A F R2 F
Q2+Q 1 + Q3 20 0
Q1 Q2+Q1
R 2R 3R
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
108 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
16. A,B,C,D
Initially
Q Q
VA VB for x = +a/2 and x = -a/2
flux is symmetric & same
RB also flux is same through
RA y = +a/2 and y = -a/2
qin 3q q q
for net flux q / 0
Fig - 1 0 0
RA > RB
VA < V B z = +a/2 and x = +a/2 are
Q+q Q–q similar so same flux.
V
V
20. 6
RA RB
For cylinder =
M R 2
= R2
Fig - 2
(A) In conductor Enet = 0 at
(B) from fig : 2 QA > QB (To make the E = Ecylinder + Esphere
potential same) = × R2
KQ A KQB
(C) R 4 R3
A R B (after connecting) 2k kQ 2 k
2kR 3 8
= 2R 2 = –
K A 4R 2A KB 4R B2 A B 2R 2R 2R
2
= R R
RA RB A B
1 R 23 23R
(D) Use E = = kR 1 – = 4 24 16 6 ...(2)
0
24 0 0
17. C,D
23 R
Also E = 16 K .....(1)
18. A,C,D 0
21. C
KQ 2KQ
E1 = E2 =
R2 R2
4KQ.R KQ
E3 = (2R)3 = E2 > E1 > E3
2R 2
22. C
for x = +a/2 and x = -a/2
flux is symmetric & same r KQ 4KQ
E1 0 2
2
also flux is same through 2 r0 r0
y = +a/2 and y = -a/2 2
qin 3q q q 4K 8K
for net flux q / 0 2r0
0 0 r02 r0
z = +a/2 and x = +a/2 are
similar so same flux.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electrostatics Part-2 | 109
23. C j(t)
r KQ 4KQ
E1 0 2
2
2
r0 r0
2
(0, 0) t
It is discharging of cylindrical capacitor.
4K 8K
2 2r0
r0 r0
28. A,D
24. D (A) As distance of energy point is same from
the charge
R2
KQ
(B) E =
a (R sec )2
R1
Now, component to the flat surface,
Q
E is uniform & both its magnitude & direction
depends on a due to the vector nature of E .
R
25. C
F1 F2
2k E
d d KQ
–q
+q (R sec )2
d E1 = E cos
KQ KQ
= cos = 2 cos3
(R sec )2 R
Right d Right d
force due to (2) force due to (2) qen
Total flux = = 0 (as qen = 0)
& due to (1) while due to (1) . 0
Thus Fnet is leftwards. This Fnet is rightwards Flux through flat surface
SHM No SHM
1
= 2 (1 – cos ) = 2 1
26. 6 2
2n So, flux through flat surface,
2n
360
r
; 60 r 60 qQ
360 1 = 4 ×
0
R
3r 40 3r
n=6 R
Since angle is 60° hence total flux will be
1/6th of total flux.
R
Q 21 1 Q
1
1
27. A 1 = 1 = 2
4 2 0 2
+ + flux through curved surface
Q 1
t 2 = – 2 1 [1 + 2 = 0]
I I0e
RC 0 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
110 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
29. AB
Field due to straight wire is perpendicular to
the wire and
radially outward. Hence EZ = 0 Length, PQ =
2R sin 60 = 3R
P z-axis
R
60°
120°
O
qin PQ 3R
Total flux = E.ds = =
0 0
=
0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 111
CURRENT
1. D
1 1 1
Vd
2. B A d2 d2
4
3RT
v v T
m
Vd1 (d / 2)2 1
3. C Vd 2 d2 4
i
j current density inversely proportional Vd2 4V
A
to area of cross section
9. D
4. C R = AB × 10C ± x %
In series circuit current is same
colour - code
n1 Vd2 4 brown – 1
i = n1eA Vd1 , i = n2eA Vd2 , n = V =
2 d1 1 black – 0
green – 5
5. C
R = 10 × 105 ± 5 %
Given that vd' = 2vd
I = neAvd , A = r2
10. B
r 2
I' = neA'vd' , A' =
4 R (Resistance decreases which increase
r 2 of temperature)
I' = ne v'
4 d
11. B
r2
I' = ne . 2Vd Given that l = 5 m, d = 10 cm. = 0.1 m.
4
I' = I/2
l 17 108 5
R 5.7 105
6. D A 0.0952
i1 = neAV , i2 = n(2e) Av/4 4
3neAV
i = i1 + i2 =
4
12. B
During stretching volume remains constant
7. C
i = neAVd
R
i is same so A
A
A Vd
x x
A'
8. C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
112 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
R'= 4R
Ax = A'(0.5 + x) 3.5 10 5 50 10 2
Rsquare =
(10 2 )2
Ax
A' = ....(1) 35
0.5 x = 102
2
4 ( x) (0.5 x)
= + ....(2) 3.5 10 5 2[1 10 2 ]
A A A' Rrectangle =
(50 10 4 )
Put value of A' in equation (2) from equation
= 7 × 10–5
(1)
17. B
4 ( x) (0.5 x)2 2
= + Q
O
O
A A Ax 4V
3
2V 2V
4x = x – x2 + (0.5)2 + x + x2 = 4V 1A
2 1A 3 2A 5
After solving x = (1/8) P
1 2A –2V 4V –1V 1V
1V
13. D Now Vp = + 2 – 4 + VQ
l VP – VQ = 2V
We know that R =
A
4a 2 18. B
x
2a2 a A
2 x
a B
y From R
8a2 8a A
8 25
(2a)
z
4a2 2a y y
x>z>y 50 50
x
14. D
A 2 x
B'coz copper is a conductor
But germanium & Si are semi conductors.
= 25 50 50
8
15. B
y
B
V I 1
R= = 25 45
I V R T1 Req. = 2 + +8=
2 2
tan = 1/R= w + T2
1 > 2 1 19. B
R1 < R2 2
V V
R1 R1
T1 < T2 2 4
A
v
T R
R2 R2
16. A
R
R=
A
V V V
2R1 = 2R 2 + 4R1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 113
24. A
1 1 1 R2
R1 = R 2 + 2R1 R1 = 2 4
i= = 1 Amp
4
20. D V = E + ir = 2 + 1 × 3 = 5V
2
R 25. B
3
In b V = E + ir
R
R 2
R
3 26. D
R
From graph I = 0 Open ckt.
A
B V=y =E
When V = 0 . Imax
11R
Req. = E = ir
18
y = xr
21. C r = y/x
E + ir = 12.5 Volt
E + (0.5 × 1) = 12.5 27. D
E = 12 volt
E – ir = V
22. D
E
E – ir = 0 V=E– .r
R r
E – ir = V (Discharging)
E + ir = V (Charging) at R = 0
E r
V= 0
23. A
L 28. C
2A R=
A 2L 2A
R=
A O
1V –4V
8V
0.8
2L L 0.8 i2
i1
8V 2.4V x
4V 0.8 i3
1V
junction
R R/4 i1 + i2 + i3 = 0
Let I be the current flow
x4 x x4
8 – IR – IR/4 = 1 + + =0
0.8 0 .8 0 .8
28 x= 0
I=
5R i.e. there is no curent in 0.8 resistor
28 4
8– × R = Vj i1 = i3 = i = = 5A
5R 0. 8
Vj = 2.4V V = E – ir = 1 – (5) (0.2) = 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
114 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
29. C
4R
a b R
4
R PQ 3 R
4R 7
3V 1 15V 2 R
3
i
Given R PQ 4
R
4
From circuit analysis we get R 4
7
18 R = 7
i=
R3
move in the circuit from point b to a 31. A
18
Vb = – (1) + 3 + Va
R3
Vb – Va = 0 = – 18 + 3R + 9
3R = 9 2
i A
R = 3 3
30. A
32. C
33. C
V2 240 240
P 115 .2KW
R 0 .5
115.2 15
100 89%
115.2
34. C
R i = 10A
+
120V –
– +
1
100V
20
= = 10
R 1
= R = 1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 115
35. A 39. C
R P=V.i, P = E. . JA
P
= EJ
A
V r
40. A
V
i= dQ
Rr i= = 2 – 16t
dt
36. B
R 1/ 8
2 R
v2
Heat = R (2 16 t) .dt ,
6
Initially H = 0
R
Now after cutting
41. B
Power in one branch V
V2
V2 nV 2 P= R=
A
= = R
R/n R
Total power R/n V2 ( 0.1 )
P' = R' =
0.9R A
nV2 nV2
= + + ... R/n
R R 1.11V 2 0 .9
P' = , R' = 0.9 =
R A A
n2 V 2
=
R V 11
P' = 1 P
100
37. B
P' increses by 11 %.
v2
H= t, & R =
R A
42. D
AV2
H t V2
We know that P
R
A
H
(200 )2 RA RB
Then RA =
300
r2
H
Heat is doubled only when r, doubled (200 )2
RB =
600 200 V D.C.
38. C
In series
2
Vrated
R= 2
R Vrated ( 200 )2
Prated Req = RA + RB, P =
( 200 )2 ( 200 )2
In series I is same. 300 600
2
Power = I2R Vrated P = 200 Watt
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
116 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
R 12 O
12
x y R 2 10
R1 × 50 = R 10 × 50 ....(2)
2
50R1 10R 2 50
Devide (2) by (1) 60R R 10
1 2
r
R 2 40
E 10
=1 ...(1) R2 = 5 ,R1 =
r xy 3
10 volt 48. A
O 6
x Potential gradient x =
1
2
6 = 4 = m
3
r
49. B
E.r case 1
E = 10 volt 12 × (100 – x) = 18 × x
xr
1200 – 12x = 18x
Ex 30x = 1200
= 10 volt ...(2)
xr x = 40 cm
case 2
E
= 1 volt ...(3) 12 × (100 – x) = 8 x
rxy 1200 – 12x = 8x
x = 1 x = 60cm
Do 20 cm distance will J have to be moved
12 1 to obtain balance.
= 10
1 r
r = 0.2 50. A
45. A R
R
Net current A A
60 I0 I0
I1 V
120
I= = 1.2A I 60 I2 P
60 40 V
Voltmeter
Rv 120 Potentiometer (finite Resistance)
1 1
I1 : I2 = : In case of voltmeter Req < R hence
60 120
=2:1 I > I0
2 As voltmeter always take some current
I1 = × 1.2 = 0.8 Amp..
3 from the circuit V < V0
hence Reading V = 0.8 × 60 = 48 V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 117
51. C 53. A
0 R 8 From V : IR
1.5
– +
0.5A 12V E
8 6 7.5 3E
When S1 is closed V1 = 3R = = 0.75E
A
N O 4R 4
8V B
1 r1
3V
6 2 E 6E
2V G When S2 is closed V2 = . 6R = = 0.85E
8 7R 7
2 12 r2
=4V
6 When both S1 & S2 are closed
8 4m E 2E
V3 = × 2R = = 0.6E
1m 2 Volt 3R 3
1 Volt 0.5 m V2> V1 > V3
0.5 volt 25 cm
52. B
1
11 volt
V = 1volt
R 10
V
I
r R
11
I= = 1 Amp,,
10 1
11 1 1 volt
Potential gradient = x = =
10 m
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
118 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. C 8. C
Given that l1 = 20 cm, R1 = 5 ,
2. C l2 = 40 cm, R2 = ?
Due to random motion During stretching volume of wire is constant
-
of e , vmean = 0 20A 40A' A' A / 2
3. D l
We know that R
A
i = neAVd
V = iR
R 2 l2 A 40 A
R 1 l1 A' 20 A
4. B 2
we no that I = neAvd
R 2 20
I I
Vd 2
neA r
9. C
2 2 y : = 0 (1 + T)
Vd1 I r 4 2
1 2 16 is –ve for semi conductor
Vd2 I
2 r1 1 1
z : temp Hence rate of collision
5. B 10. A
in this question n p
A s, e q R1 = B B (1 + BT)
A
i = neAVd
i R2 = C C (1 + CT)
= Vd A
nAe
Req. = R1 + R2
6. D
Req. = B B + B B BT + C C + C C CT
A A A A
F = –e E Net resistance is independent of temp.
–
So e moves randomly but slowly drift
B BB T T
opposite to E. + C C C =0
A A
7. B B C C
Given that l = 15 m, A = 6.0 × 10-7 m2. C = B B
R = 5 , = ?
RA 5 6 107
0.2 106 m
l 15
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 119
11. D 19. B
Apply current density concept
I j . dA
x dx
Folding symmetry
x
J0 1 for 0 x R /2
R
I= x R
J0 R for
2
xR
R /2 R
x x
i=
0
J0 1 2xdx +
R
J R 2xdx
R /2
0
R R R 7R
R eq
5 3 3 2 6
i= J0R2
12
20. B
12. D
13. D B i/3 C
i/6
14. D 2i
A D 3
i/3 i=0
15. A
i/6 i/3
i/2
16. C G
F
i/3 i/6
17. C i/2
H
i/6 E
18. D
A 1 B
V
1 21. A
1 1
5 3 3
E 2A 1A 1A 0.5
D (1 – x) V x C
10 10 4
28V
( 2 x )1 2
x= , x – 4x + 2 = 0
3x
4 2 3
x=2± 2
After circuit Analysis we get Req = 14
CE 2 2
= 28
ED 2 1 I= = 2 amp..
14
CE ( 2 2 )( 2 1) 2 2 22 2
= =
ED ( 2 1)( 2 1) 1
CE
= 2
ED
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
120 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
(E + ir)A B
23. A
2R 2R n–2
2R
P r r Q Eneq = (n – 4) . E rneq = nr
From circuit analysis we get
2R 2R
V = E + ir ....(1)
Due to mirror symmetry circuit becomes as like
(n 4 )E E (n 4)E .r 2
2R 2R i= ,
nr = 2E 1 n
nr
P r Q
27. B
r
r1 1
2R 2R
Req = 2rR/r+R
R x r2 2 O
A B
24. B
R r3 3
L R
2L 2R
Q' = 2Q x 1 x 2 x 3
to raise T r1 + r2 + r
3
=0
2R
temperature in
x = 2 volt
same time t.
I'2 R't = 2I2 RT
28. C
I'2 (2R) T = 2I2RT
In series V = V1 + V2 = 20V
I' = I
nE 3E 29. B
= n=6
2R R Let potential of junction is x , then current
shown in circuit
25. B
E1 6V
r1 E2 r2
O
E2 – ir2 20
i1 x i2
10V 10 i3
30
R
E1 E2
i 5V
R r1 r2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 121
E nE 36. D
32. A i= =
r /n r
R
33. A 2i/3
For power maximum
i 3R
2R
rmax
P = i2r i/3
i2r V2 4I2R
r P1 I2R
In first case Req = , P1 = R 9
3 3
In second case Req = 3r, P2 = i23r
P 2 I2 3R
3r i2 3r
In third case Req = , P3 =
2 2 P1 4
2r i2 2r P2 27
In forth case Req = , P4 =
3 3
From above four cases P2 > P3 > P4 > P1
37. A
34. A I2R is maximum for R1 resistance As I > I1 &
I2
V2
Situation shown in diagram P =
R 50 I2
Case I Case II I I1
3V 50 20
(200)2 (200)2
R1 R2
60 100 maximum power dissipation in R1.
38. B
P = V.I V I2
200 V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
122 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
39. B 42. C
As Req decreases Inet increases hence current
through X increases but as Inet will now be
distributed in Y & Z, current in Y decreases.
40. A
i = At B
at t= T, i = 0 R
0 = AT + B
AT = –B
For balanced condition
T T R1R3 = R4R2
R2 R3
T 2
4q2 t
=
T 2 1 T .R.dt
0 43. B
S2 is open
3 2
4q T ( T ) 2( T )
2
4q2R 6V
= 2 2 2 T R=
T 3( T ) 3T
G
41. D
A B
All resistances are parallel so potential is L/2 /2
same
()
V = 0.3 × 20 = 6V O
According to diagram
1 1 1
i1 : i1 : i3 = R : :
1 20 15
= 6V = 12V
= 60 : 3R1 : 4R1 2
L 12V
3R1
0.3 = 60 7R × (0.8) 7L
1
7 volt
12
R1 = 60
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 123
10 47. A
We can observer that 10, 10 and 20 are
6V r shorted and bypassed, so no current will flow
12 7 Volt
5L/12 G 45V
12 O in then and I = = 0.5 A.
90
7L/12
O
+
12V 90
45V 10
6 – ir = 5 A 10
–
6 20
6– r= 5
10 r
Alternative :
6r = 10 + r r = 2
44. D 90 I
+ A
r = ig (R + rg) – –
10 –
– 10
45. C
20
45V
V I 0.5A
R= 90
i i1
4A
i1 < 4A
20 = i1R 4A
i2
20 A
R = i > 5
1 20V
46. A
D R
+ –
J
A
B
r
C G
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
124 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
E1 A 2
R= = = same E2 A1
t t
V = iR = same dx
i same P = i2R i2
A
i2R same.
6. A,C
3. A,B,C
Current should be maximum in 2
A B
O 8
E+ir
R
4. A,C,D Should be minimum
1V 2V
A 3 R = 0 (power should be maximum
1 –1 when r = 0)
i3
O Power = 72 watt.
D x
i1 B
7. A,C
2
3 4 i2 V 10 V
3V 1V R1 1k
I 10mA
220V (A) and (C)
Let potention of point B is x then from
R2 4 .4 k
kirchhoff's first law 50mA
i1+i2+i3 = 0 8. A,D
To ensure maximum current through
x x2 x 1
+ + =0 ammeter its resistance should be small.
2 4 3 To ensure minimum current through
6x 3x 6 4x 4 voltmeter its resistance must be very large.
= 0
12
9. B,C
13x = 2
Given R = 100 , ig =50 A
2
x= volt rg
13 i = ig 1 R
5. A,B,C,D V = ig (r + Rg)
E2 10. A,B
E1
As emf of E1 is distributed over the wire AB.
(1) dr (2) Hence A is correct E2 is balanced by fraction
dx of length of wire E1 > E2.
We only balance potential difference hence
B is correct.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 125
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
126 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
10. 1127 K
RF Ri 1 T
2 1 1 0.00125 T2 300
T2 300 800
T2 = 1100K 22
RAB =
35
11. 1
A
3r
2 14.
5
O 1
1 1 1 FD & EC will be removed due to symmetry
x x
because D & F are symmetric to E & C.
1 RAB = 3r/5
2 2
y 1 y
15. zero
Due to folding symmetry circuit is as like
A x
2 3 6 10
4.5 3
1 1
4.5V
1 1 3V
D O
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 127
18. 1
21. R1 R 2
4 R x 4
6 2 2
2
. R . t = . R . t
4V R r R2 r
10 1 2
1
10
0 0 0
R2
R1 r = R2 r . R1
19. 1V
For imin Rmax . So S1 is open,
r= R1R 2
S2 is open & S3 is open
22. 90 watt
6 3 2A
a
6
1A 1A 2
1 9 10 E E2
1 1 = R = (when in series)
2A 3 3R 9R
24V b
O O O E2
= 30 ...(1)
R
From circuit analysis we get
E2
Req = 12 In Parallel = 30
R
I = 24/12 = 2 A
So total 3 × 30 = 90 watt
Va – V b = 1 V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
128 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
= 1 Watt = 1Watt
P 1000 cal 240cal
(d) Joule/sec. = _
~
4 .2 4.2 sec . sec (F) EI = 10 × 1 = 10 (in ech case)
(G) (A) 10 – ir – V = 0
dm
(e) P = L V = 10 – 1
dt
= 9 volt
dm dm 12
240 = 540 × = gm / sec (B) 10 + ir – V = 0
dt dt 27
V = 11 volt
12 80 (H) (A) P = – [Vbox I] (B) Vbox I
× 60 gm/minute = gm / min ute
27 3
= – [9 × 1] = 11 × 1
= – 9 Watt = 11 Watt
25. 90%
iR 27. 4
60 = × 100 3 (R + r) = 5R
i(R r )
i3 5 i4 5
3r = 2R 6
i2 4
i(6R) 6R i5
now = × 100 = × 100 i 1 2
i(6R r ) 2R
6R i
3
= 90 V
1 1 1
26. (a) E = 10 V each i1 : i2 : i3 = : : = 15 : 5 : 6
2 6 5
(b) (A) act as a source and
15 5 6 4
(B) act as load i1 = × i, i2 = × i, i3 = × i, i4 = ×
26 26 26 9
(c) VA = 9V, VB = 11 V i
(d) PA = 9 W, PB = 11 W
5
(e) Heat rate = 1 W each i5 = check i2R for all
9
(f) 10 watt.
(g) 9V, 11 V 28. 600
(h) –9W, 11 W
(a) E = 10V in each case 100
A
(b) (A) as source (B) as load
(C) (A) E – ir = 10 –1 = 9V
R 50
(B) E + ir
= 10 + 1 = 11 volt + –
300 1.5 V
(D) (A) output (B) Output
P = VI P = VI
When both switches open then
= 9 × 1 = 9 watt = 11 × 1
1 .5 1
= 11 watt i= i= Amp..
450 300
(E) (A) i2R (B) i2R
When closed
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 129
1 5
volt A O 7
3 1/300 60 V
1 R
volt O
3
1 I 0.4
volt O 41 7
3 300 20V V
1.5V 4 8
2 10
1 1
×R= R = 600
6 300 3
From circuit analysis we get
1
= 1.5 – i × 300 12 48
3 Req = + 0.4 + 6 = 16
12 48
7
i= 60 20
6 300 I= = 2.5 Amp
16
1
3 3 5 .5 I1 = × 2.5 = 0.5 Amp..
29. 0.15 A , 0.83 A 5
20 20
V = 7 × 0.5 = 3.5 Volt
5.5V 25 5
31. V 2.78 V, A 0. 278 A
9 18
x
A i4 i3 i2 i1
5 10 2 1 5A
10A
10 20 20 r
20 10 3
i1 + i2 + i3 + i4 + 5 = 10
x x x x
For imax (rmin = 0) + + + + 5 = 10
1 2 10 5
E 5 .5
imax = = = 0.825 A 50 25 50 1 5
20 20
rmin 0 x= = V, i10 = = A
3 3 18 9 18 10 18
96 480 O
24
30. I = 2.5 A, V = 3.5 volts +R = 96
5
R = 20
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
130 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
V
i= R G
eq i 20 i1
10m
O
2volt
20 30
i= 20V G
10 20 480
500 1 1.5 volt
(a) 2V 5
34. 46.67 cm
2
0 10V 10 35
10m
O 30
2
30
35
2V 12 G
5V volt
1 O 7
3V 3
V G
+ – B
2V
1 12 70
A volt 10m, 1 volt m
3 7 12
4V 5
70
1.5 V × 1.5 m = 8.75m
12
35. 4 ohm
10V
10 O
(b)
40 cm
10
O
G
5V
– +
10
5 1 G
5
5 1 6Volt
R 1 R
5
5
5+ × 1 = 6 Volt
1 R
5 = 1 + R R = 4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 131
(a) from I = JA vx x
v 0 A e 0 x / L
I R
r
dv L e 1 A e
0
dx
v0 0
0 dI 0 J0 1 R 2rdr r dr
v0 e L x /L
2
vx v0 e
L e 1 1
x
0
J0R
I
3
v 0e
vx v0 [e x / L 1]
J0 A (1 e)
I
3
(e x / L 1)
I R vx v0 1
1
J0 r (1 e )
(b) dI R .2rdr
0 0
e x / L e 1
v x v0 1
1 e
3
2J0 R 2 2J0 A
I J0R 2 I
R 3 3 3
5
4. eff
0L 1 V0 A e 4
3. R 1 ; I ;
A e 0L e 1
1 1 1
x /L 1 R eq R1 R 2
V0 ( e e )
V 1
1 e
1 1 1
Given = 0 e–x/L
R eq (1 eff ) R (1 t ) 3R (1 2t )
0 e x / L dx
(a) dR 3R
A R eq
4
L
1
0 e x / L dx = L 0 [ e x / L ]L0 4 1 1
R
A0 A
3(1 eff t) (1 t) 3(1 2t)
4 1
(1 eff t)1 (1 t)1 (1 2t)1
3 3
V0 0
x (using binomial theorm
dx
4 1
(1 eff t) (1 t) (1 2t)
3 3
0L 1
R 1
A e
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
132 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Case - II
4 3 3t 1 2t
(1 eff t)
3 3 r
r r r r
5 r
4 – 4 eff t= 4 – 5 t, eff =
4 r
1 3 1 R2 3
Now Re q
x 5 x R1 5
d 1
0 for (Req )max
dx R eq 8. 7/5 times the length of any side of the square
Given circuit is
r
r
1 1 r
0 A i1 2r B i 1–i3 C
r r
(5 x)2 ( x)2 i3 r
i I
r
x= 2 r r
i2 r
F E 2r i 2+i3 D r
3
Now circuit is R eq
11
I1 – 2 I2 – 4 I3 = 0 ...(2)
r r r r i3 1 2
i 3.5 7
R1 = 5r
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 133
(k 1) 2
;
k (k 1) /k V
2
0
9. (i) (ii)
k (k 1) R3
1 V0 V0 V0 1
(i) 1 K R KR KR 1 K
1 2 1
K 1 1 K 1 vb – va = 12 V
R1 R 2 KR 1
K 1 1 1
1 (ii)
R1 K R 2
V0 R1 R1 R1
V0/k V0/k2 V0/kn–2 V0/kn–1 V0/kn
V 0/k[1 – 1/k]
V 0/R 1K[1 – 1/k]
V0/KR2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R3
R1 (K 1)2
R2 K
36
Now from again apply KCL i= = 9A
4
V0 V0 1 V0 V0 R
k n 2 K n 1 R k n 1R k nR
1 2 3
I1
11. E = I1R
k2 k k 1
R1 R 2 R3 E
R2 R R
K(K 1) K 2
R1 R3
I2 2E = I2R
R2 K
R3 K 1
E E
V V (K 1) V0 K 1 R
(ii) i 0 0 2 = R 2
KR 2 K R3 3 K
I3
10. (i) Vab = –12 V, (ii) 3 amp from b to a E E = I3R
(i) When switch is open
E
36
i 8A
9/2 6E 2 6E 2
36 V Now 3I3I2 = 2 ,
2I1(I2 I3 ) 2
R R
6 3 22
12. Volt
9
KCL at point P, Q, R, S then find out
3 6
4
9x = 4 x=
9
0V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
134 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
4 15. 11 6 2
vB – 1 – 1 – = vA
9 Let us assume each wire have cross sec-
tional area is A and square of length then
x+4 1V x+3 1V x+2 1V x+1 1V x R
i2 i1 S D C
P i3 Q R R=
A
V2 R R
PAB
1V 1V 1V 1V 0 R
for power in DC
22 A B
vA – vB = – volt R
9
R 2
v
2 1
V 2 v 12
13. (i) 10.52 ; (ii) 0.3125 v1
R 2 3 2 2 , PDC R
(a) 0.44 = 0.2 V5/2 2R
2 1
V5/2 = 2.2 ...(1)
6 – V = 0.44 R ...(2)
R
Solving (1) & (2), we get D C
R R
0.2V5/2 R
V
2R
V1
6V
PAB ( 3 2 2) 2
11 6 2
R = 10.52 PDC 2
Prod = 2 Presistance
(VI)rod = 2 (I2R)resistance
16. 7.2 m
(b) 0.2 V5/2 × V = 2 × (0.2 V5/2)2 R
Resistane of potentiometer wire
0.2 V7/2 = 0.08 V5 R
= 11.5 × 10 = 115
1 = 0.4 V3/2 R
6 – V = 0.2 V5/2 R 2
Current in the circuit i = A
6 = V(1.5) 115
1
R= 0.3125 2V
3 .2
400 400 4
x= W , mgh = m= kg/sec. So i (6.9 × 11.5) = V,
9 9 9
2
200 V 6.9 11 .5 1.38 V
t = 9 = 450 sec. 115
4
after 5 is also connected then
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 135
10 E
17. 233.3, 144V 54 × 10–3 = ...(1)
10 r
(10 r )100
300 10 r
Current sensitivity = = 6 mA/div..
50
Similarly
E 50 E ...(2)
I Amp. 30 6 10 3
100 10 r 50 r
10 r (50 r )100
50 r
(effective resistance of circuit
from eq. (1) & (2)
= 100 + (10r/10+r))
r = 233.33
s 10
E = 144 V
90
G
ig rg=r
I
18. RA=8/3R, RV=8R
10
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
136 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
or R1 R 2 R 2R 2 8. B
or R = R2-R1 Let resistance of bulb filament is R0 at 00C
then from expression
3. A
R = R0(1+)
V2 V2
H1 t and H2 t
R (R / 2) we have, 100 = R0[1+0.005 x 100]
H2 and 200 = R0[1+0.05x]
2 or H2 = 2H1
H1 0
where x is temperature in C at which
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 137
9. B
30 15 10
For balanced wheatstone's bridge
P R
I
Q S I
S1S2 P R(S1 S2 )
here S S1 S2 + - + -
S1 S2 Q S1S2 5V
10. D V 5
So, I 0.5A
Kirchhoff's 1st law or KCL states that the R 10
algebraic sum of current meeting at any
junction is equal to zero. In other words, we 12. C
can say that "the sum of all the currents From Rt = R0 (1+t)
directed towards a junction in a circuit is
5 = Ro (1+50) ...(i)
equal to the sum of all the currents directed
away from that junction." Thus, no charge and 6 = R0(1+100) ...(ii)
has been accumulated at any junction ie,
5 1 50
charge is conserved, and hence, we can say
6 1 100
that KCL ( i 0) is based on conservation
1
of charge. or
200
Kirchhoff's IInd law or KVL states that
algebraic sum of changes in potential around putting value of in Eq. (i) we get
any closed resistor loop must be zero. In
1
other words, "around any closed loop, 5 R o 1 50
voltage drops are equal to voltages rises". 200
No energy is gained or lost in circulating a or R0 = 4 .
charge around a loop, thus, we can say that
KVL is based on conservation of energy. 13. D
11. B Let (A, lA, rA, AA) and (B, lB, rB, AB) are specific
The given circuit can be redrawn as resistances, lengths, radii and areas of wires
A and B rspectively.
A lA A lA
Resistance of A = RA= A r2
A A
B lB B lB
Resistance of B = RB= A r2
B B
I
From given information,
+ - B = 2A
5V rB = 2rA and RA = RB
Which is a balanced Wheatstone's bridge and A lA B lB
hence, no current flows in the middle
rA2 rB2
resistor, so equivalent circuit would be as
shown below. A lA 2A lB
or
rA2 (2rA )2
lB 2
or 2 :1
lA 1
I
14. B
From balanced Wheatstone bridge concept,
+ - 55 20
or R = 220
R 80
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
138 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
P1 R 0 (1 1)R o (1 2 )
RPo (1 p )
R o (1 1 ) R o (1 2 )
Where,
5V -2V
5V R oR o R
2V R PO o
P2 Ro Ro 2
Vo 5 Vo 0 Vo (2) Ro R 2 (1 1 2 1 2 2 )
0 (1 p ) 0
2 10 1 2 R o (2 1 2 )
5 as 1 and 2 are small quantities
or Vo
16
1 2 is negligible
V 1 2
Sox, current through 10 resistor is o or P 2 ( )
10 1 2
from P2 to P1.
1 2 1 2
1
2 2
16. C
As (1 2 )2 is negligible
Choosing A as origin,
1 2
1 P
E j 2
2r 2
(a b) 20. B
1 1 l 1 1
VC VB dr at t = 0 Inductor behaves as open circuit.
2 a
r2 2 (a b) a
so, I = V/R2 at t = 0
1 1 1
VB VC 21. B
2 a (a b)
Resistance of combination Re = 4R
R e R 5 x 100
17. C 5%
Re R 100
18. D 22. D
Potential gradient of a potentiometer,
7
19. D I 0.2 x 4 x 10
K 7 = 0.1 V/m
A 8 x 10
let R 0 be the initial resistance of both
23. A
conductors
At temperture their resistances will be, Sl Sl 2
R (V volume)
A V
R1 = R0 (1+1)
R l
and R2 = R0 (1+2) 2 0.2 %
R l
For series combination,
Rs = R1+R2 24. C
As the rated power of 25 W is less than 100
Rso (1+s) = Ro (1+1)+Ro (1+2)
W, it implies that 25 W bulb has higher
Where Rso = Ro +Ro =2Ro resistance. As in series connection, current
2R0(1+s)=2Ro+Ro(1+2) through both the bulbs is same but heating
in 25 W bulb is more than that of 100W
1 2 bulb. So, 25 W bulb will get fused.
or s
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 139
25. A 29. B
From Ohm's law, i = neAVd
V V l
R ln R ln V ln i = neAV
Vd {R }
i R A
R V i VA
3% 3% 6% = neAV
Vd
R V i
5
26. B + –
0.1
27. B 9V
Statement-I (False)
x
Q
G
I = Ig 1
R x 9 x 6 x
+ + =0
If R More 5 3 1
I Less
3x 27 5x 30 15x
Statement-II (True) =0
15
Addition shunt in parallel decreases the
resistance. 3
x= A
23
28. A from Q to P
V2 31. D
P=
R
S
(200)2
R1 = i-ig
40
Total current
G
V V V V i ig
= R × 15 + R × 5 + R × 5 + R × 1
1 2 3 4 G = 100, ig = 1 mA
R = V /P2 i = 10
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
140 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
32. B 37. C
For cu, resistance increases linearly 13V
For Si, resistance decreases exponentially
12V
33. A 0 x
i–i1 A
0
2V i1 i
From junction law we can write
x 12 x 13 x 0
+ + =0
2V i1 1 2 0
i i–i1
10x – 120 + 5x – 65 + x = 0
B 16 x = 186
185
+2 – 2 – i1R = 0 x=
16
–2 + i (1) + 2
11.5625
–2 – (i – i1) 1 + 2 + i1 = 0
Which is lies in between 11.5 V and 11.6 V
–i + i1 + i1 = 0
i 38. D
i = 2i1 i1 =
2 R1 x
0 – 2 – i1 (1) + 2 = 0 R 2 = (100 x) ....(1)
i1 = 0 , i = 0
R2 x 10
R 1 = (110 x) ....(2)
34. 4 R1 + R2 = 1000
On solving we get
E
I= r r
2 39. C
40cm
Er2
V= r r
2
E r
q = CV
C Er2
= r r
2
35. 3
E = 52k
is wrong
v = 40 k
36. D t
Potential barrier due to a silicon diode in the r = 1 R
v
given condition = 0.7 V
In this forward biased diode 52k
=5 1
v 3 0.7 203 40k
i= = = = 0.0115 A = 11.5
R 200 200
26
mA =5 1
20
= 1.5
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 141
1. D x 2
100 rg G
i =100×10–6 1 i ig 1
0 .1 R (y + 20)
(80 – y)
= 100.1 mA x > 2
2(100 – y) = xy ...(i)
2. Error Ka sawal hai.
x (80 – y) = 2(y + 20) ...(ii)
x. 1 = R × 2
After solving we get x = 3
x 1 R 2
R= x=
2 1 5. A - 's, q' or 's' alone
B - 'q'
R.d 2 R.d 1. 2 C - 'p, q' or 'p' alone
dx = –
1 12 D - 'q, r' or 'r' alone
For error
6. C
dx d 2 d 1
= + For R1
x 2 1
Wheat stone Bridge valid
for minimum error 1 = 2 R1 = 1
for R2 = 0.5 (Wheat stone Bridge valid)
3. A for R3 = 2(from simple circuit annalysis)
R= V2
A R1 R2 Power P =
R
P2 > P1 > P3
R1 =
2( 2r )2
7. D
R1
R2 = = x
2r 2 4 R.B.
P1 = i2 R1 ...(i) G n.d.
P2 = i2R2 = i2 R1/4 ...(ii)
From (i) and (ii) P1 = 4 P2 If x & null deflection remains same R.B.
should increase.
4. A
2 x 8. A,D
a 6 1.5
Rtotal = 2 + = 3.2 k
6 1.5
y (100 – y)
24 V
(A) I = = 7.5 mA = IR1
3.2k
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
142 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
RL
IR 2 =
RL R2 I = 1.5 mA 11. C
IRL = 6mA V R1
V = G1
A
(B) VRL = ( IRL ) (RL) = 9V RT
A = G2
2 R2
PR1 IR R1 V
1 25
(C) P = 2 =
R2 IR R 2 3
2
Earlier it was 9V
P V2 R
9. C 2
2
J1 R
R 2
L
R=
A
2
J2 R
L R 1 /2
R=
Lt
L J1
t = 2.25 R = 4
J2
L
R=
t
13. B
10. D = 52 + 1 = 53
= 48 + 2 = 50
V2
P= & 100 W > 60 W > 40 W
R
X 10
V2 V2 V2
> >
R100 R 60 R 40
1 1 1 52 48
R100 > R 60 > R 40
x 530
x = = 10.6 ohm
10 ' 50
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Current | 143
V2
14. 5 Since P =
R
6v 6v 0v R
Series : Req = time half
2
A B
1A R 1
Parallel : Req = time times
8 8
6v 3v 3v 1V
18. 5
vA–6–i–2i+3 = vA
i = –1A
vA –vB= 5 V
15. A,B,C,D
By symmetry the 1 resistances don't get ig = 0.006 Amp.
any current so circuit reduces to
6
30 = [4990+ Rg]
1000
4990 + Rg = 5000
Rg = 10
s 0.006 6
10 1.494 1494
60 10
s=
1494 249
12 n= 5
I1
6 12 = 3A
6 12 19. B
The connection is in parallel
16. A,B,D
A A A
VA = V B RA = A =
A (49 10 4 106 )
6
V1 = iR1 .....(i)
V2 = iR3 .....(ii)
2.7 10 8 50 10 3
(i)/(ii) = = 3 × 10–5
45 10 6
V1 R1
Fe Fe F
V2 R 3 10 7 50 10 3
RFe = = 6 =
AFe (4 10 ) 4 10 6
17. B,D 25 25
= × 10–7–3+6 = × 10–4
2 2
25
3 10 5 10 4
R A R Fe 2
R= =
R A FFe 25
3 10 5 10 4
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
144 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
24. A,B,C,D
3 10 5 12.5 10 4
=
3 105 12.5 10 4 0V
9
12.5 3 10 25k
=
128 10 5
5 – 0
375 375 V
× 10–10+5 × 10–5 +
128 128
50F
3750 1875
× 10–6 A
128 64 (a) 5V
20. 1 Amp. + –
(Using two times wheatstone bridge) Key 5V
21. A 5V
at t = 0 25k
+ + –
5 0
V
+
50F
t
RC A
I I0e 0V
j(t) + –
Key 5V
(0, 0) t
22. C,D
As the temperature increases, m decreases.
So frequency of radiation increases with
increase in temperature and resistance
increases. So current decreases and hence
power consumed (P = Vi) decreases (V is
constant given)
V = 5 (1 – e–t/RC)
23. A,C RC = 1
V = Ig (Rg + S) V = 5 (1 – e–ln(2))
if Rg and S is large V V = 2.5 V
Potential difference is zero.
Rg (c) I = I 0(e–t/RC)
I Ig 1 RC = 1
s
at t = 1 sec.
if s Rg I = I0/e
Then I (d) at =
I= 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 145
CAPACITANCE
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
1. A are required.
C = 4oR
8 8 8 8
C
R = 4 = 1 × 10–6 × 9 × 109 = 9 km
0
8 section Total : 32
2. D
Charge / Current flows from higher to lower
potential or Q/C ratio.
8. B
Solving the circuit using following steps
3. A V C
C
x
Charge / Current flows from higher to lower
C C C
potential or Q/C ratio.
KQ KQ 0 0
VA , VB VA > VB 0
R 2R A
AB C C/2
C C
4. B
B
0 A C
Given C = A
d
If separation is halved d' = d/2 3C/2
C
0 A 2
C' = 0A/d' = = 2C
d B
A
1 .5C
5. C C 2.5
Q1 900C Q2 2500C
3400 9. C
900 2500 (3 5)V V 425V
8 1
U CV2
2
6. C 1
Ci = 40r = × 4 × 10–6 × (1 × 103)2
2
Cf = 40R = 2 Joules.
The volume of the n drops is equal to the bigger
drop.
10. A
4 3 4
N r = R3 Initially
3 3
R = N1/3r 1 1
Ui CV2 0.5 106 104 0.25 10 2 J
Cf = N1/3 40r 2 2
When the 0.5 F capacitor is connected to an
7. D uncharged capacitor let the common potential
To form a composite of 1000 V we need 4 is V.
capacitance in series. 0.5 × 100 = 0.7 V
0.5 100 500
4 capacitance in series means in each branch V Volt
0 .7 7
capacitance is 2 F. So 8 branches are needed 1 500 500
Uf = × 0.7 × 10–6 × ×
in parallel. So a total of 8 × 4 = 32 capacitors 2 7 7
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
146 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
11. B
1 1 O
Ui = CV2 + 2C × (2V)2 V
2 2
When the two capacitors are connected D
B
together let the common potential is Vf.
CV –CV From junction law
3CV (V – 10)1 + (V – 20)3 + (V – 25)2 = 0
q q
= Vf 6V = 120
3C
–4CV +4CV V = 20 Volt
0 12V 2F x
13. D
24V 1F
b 2 2 5µF 4µF
Applying junction law
a c d e
2µF 3µF (x – 6)4 + (x – 12)2 + (x – 24)1 = 0
72
7x = 72 x = volt
7
100V 72
Since potential of point d & e is same. No charge So, Va – Vb = 0 – x = – Volt
will be stored on 5µF capacitor. 7
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 147
(ii) 5 18
q2 =
10
0S charge on 5F capacitor is 9C
C=
x
charge on 4F capacitor is 24C
1 1 0 S 2
U = CV2 = V Ratio of charges = 9 : 24 = 3 : 8
2 2 x
2
dU 1 0 SV 2µF
F=– = 2 3µF
dx 2 x 6V O
x
x2
1 1 2 5µF
W= F .dx = SV2 x x1
6 O
x1
2 0 4µF
1 1 1 6V
W= SV2 x x
2 0 1 2
22. D
18. A Q Q2
–q1 q1
Q1
5µF 3µF 60V C C/2
–20µC –q2 q2
+20µC
4µF 3
Q= C × 60 = 90C
q1 : q2 = 3 : 4 2
Q1 : Q2 = C1 : C2 = 2 : 1
3 1
q1 = × 20µC = 8.57c Q2 = × 90 = 30 C
7 3
30C
19. C Potential difference across C = = 30 V
C
1 1
V1 : V 2 = : =2:1
3 6 23. B
1 7µF
V2 = × 24 = 8
3
35µF
0
1 A B
E= (1) (8)2 = 32µJ x y
2µF
2
10µF
As the resulting circuit is a Wheat stone bridge
hence current in 13F capacitor is zero. Hence
the circuit now reduces to
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
148 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
21 = 2
2Q1 = Q2
A B Q1 + Q2 = 2Q
3Q1 = 2Q
2Q 4Q
Q1 = and Q2 =
3 3
35 10 45
The resultant capacitance is + =
6 6 6
15 –4Q/3 2Q/3
= F 1.5Q 1.5Q
2 4Q/3 –2Q/3
24. B
Initial charge on third plate = 0
C1C2
For capacitors in series Ceq C C 3Q 2Q 5Q
1 2 Final Charge = – =
2 3 6
As C1 = C2 .................. = Cn hence
5Q
C Charge flown =
Ceq 6
n
For capacitors in parallel
26. B
Ceq C1 C2 C3 .................Cn
E
1 1 1 1 B
Ceq 1 ............ A
2 4 8 16 4 5
1 2 3 C
4
1
2F C
1
1 1
2 2 3
C
25. A
2C C 2 0 A
Initially Ceq =
3C 3d
Q 2Q 2 0 A
-Q Q 3Q -3Q 3Q
2 2
Q= × ×E
3Q
2 2 2 3 d
d 2d
2
K 27. B
10V
After closing key first and third plate come at
same potential. 10V O
A
V V1 V B –20 20 0V
-Q2 Q2 Q1 -Q1 3Q 10V 20 –20
2 C
3Q d 2d 20 –20
2 D –20 20 0V
10V E
0
Total charge on plate C = 40 C
E1 × 2d = E2 × d
1 1 2
E1 = , V1 – V = 2d = d
0 0 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 149
31. C
For metal k =
So charge flown = [charge finally – charge Hence from formula.
initially]
oA
= C – C/2 Ceq =
= C/2 d t t /k
C 2 C 0 A
Work done by battery = C
2 2 (d t)
(iii) Initial energy
32. B
1 Q2 1 Q2
Ui
2 C 2 C 0 A
Initially Ci =
d
2
C 1 1 Finally after plate is inserted
C 2
2 C 4
oA
1 Cf = for metals K = and t = d/2
Uf C 2 d t t /k
2
1 o A
Change = C 2 C' 2C
4 d/2
(iv) Heat = Work done by battery - (Uf-Ui)
1 1 1 33. B
= C 2 C 2 C 2
2 4 4 Electric field between two plates of capacitor is
given by
K 0
29. A
Q1max = 3 C × 103 C.
When K = 1 then E =
Q2max = 4 C × 103 C. 0
Qmax for first branch 3 C × 103 C
then K = K then E = K
3 0
3C 10 5C
5
Vmax = KV = 2.5 KV When K= then E = 0. From the formula
1
6C2 2 V = E.d.
Similarly for second branch
Now positive plate at x = 0 is at higher potential
Q3 = 7C ×103 C Q4max = 6C × 103C and potential drops linearly as E is constant.
max
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
150 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
38. B
C
Initially Ceq =
2
C
So, Q1 = Ceq V = E
2
V O C(KC) KC
Finally Ceq = =
34. A C CK 1K
Electric field between two plates of capacitor is KCE
So, Q2 = C'eq E =
1K
given by K
0 So, change flow throw battery = Q2 – Q1
When K = 1 then E = K 1
q = C E
0 1 K 2
then K = K then E = CE(K 1)
K 0
q =
On increasing dielectric constant electric field 2(1 K)
decreases.
39. A
K=2 0 A
Charge on capacitor Q = CV = V
K=4 d
0 .2 1 0 A 2
0.4 Initial energy = CV2 = V
2 2d
(d,0) (3d,0)
Q2 C2V 2 1 CV 2
Final energy = = =
35. C 2CK 2CK 2 K
So,
Vi = Eid = d = 3000 work done = [Final energy – Initial energy]
0
1 1
Vf = Efd = d = 1000 = CV 2 1
2 K
= 3 = 30 = 27 × 10–12 C2/Nm2 0 AV2 1 1
0 = K
2d
36. B
40. D
0 A Initially Finally
C=
t E E
dt + – + –
k
0 A 3 0 A
Now =
t 2 d
d t
k
t 2d t 2 C C C CK
d = = C CK
2 3 d 3 n
C = C n
=
eq eq
2 K 1
37. A CE CEK
qi = qf =
Vmax = Emax dmax = 4000 2 K 1
4000 CEK CE
d= qf – qi = qflown = –
18 106 K 1 2
0 KAmin
Now, C = = 7 × 10–2 µf CE(K 1)
dmax =
2(K 1)
7 10 2 10 6 4000
A= = 0.62 m-2 CE CEK
8.85 10 12 2.8 18 106 <
2 K 1
So charge flows from C to B.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 151
41. C 45. C
q
Initially E = = A B
0 0
= 200 × 102 V/m 6µf 2µf
Q Q 100V 0V
C= =
V E.d 1µf
i=0
Q
C= ....... (1) A 0V
200 102 0.05 100V 30
In final situation By dividing protential across 6F & 2F
charge remains uncharged
100
Q VA – VB = V6µf = ×2
C' = ....... (2) (6 2)
V'
From (1) & (2) VA – VB = V6µf = 25V
0 A 0 A Now, VB – VC = V2µf = 100 – 25 = 75 Volt
2 V = × 200 × 102 × 0.05
3 10 5 102
V = 3 × 10–2 × 200 × 102 = 600 V
46. D
After steady state capacitor acts as an open
circuit.
47. C
After steady state capacitor acts as an open
V – + O
x 2cmy circuit.
42. B t= 12
In the Presence of dielectric: c1=K0 1A
Cf = 5C0
Capacitor is charges & battery is not 2A 9 3A
3A
U0
connected Uf 15V
K
W0 W Req = 5
Uf 0
K 5 15
i= = 3A
K 5 5
W0 Hence potential across capacitor is 12 volt.
Answer is 5c0 ,
5
44. D 2
So VC = i2 × 10 = Volt = Q/c
Inside a charged capacitor if dielectric is 3
filled then charge Remains same.
2
Q= × 6 = 4µC
3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
152 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
49. D
To calculate charge on capacitor consider 52. D
that capacitor acts as open circuit when Initally the capacitor acts a closed circuit
completely charged and calculate drop across 2
i= = 2 mA
it which comes out to be 3V. 1000
When s is opened i.e. discharging circuit After steady state capacitor acts as an open
2
3A circuit i = = 1 mA
3V 0 2000
3A at t = 0, I = 2mA and at t = I = 1mA
9V 6A
300µC 53. B
The energy dissipated in the 10 resistor is
equal to initial energy stored is capacitor
Q2
1/2 3.6 × 10–3 =
R eqC 2 2 10 6
1 Q = 120 µC
= 100 10 6 103 = 50 10 3 = 50 ms.
2
50. C 54 C
Steps to calculate time constant. Vc= v = 5V
After long time capacitor behave like open
Replace battery by simple wire to find Req.
circuit.
Apply formula = ReqC.
3R 7R
+R= = Req
4 4
6
I 1.5A
4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 153
1. D 7. B
The curve shown is for a function xy = constant
Q = CV 10
30 2
2. D 0
A x B
k 0 A y
C=
d
where k = dielectric constant of medium 6
between the plates
A = Area, d = distance between the plates As the resulting circuit is a Wheat stone bridge
hence current in 5F capacitor is zero. Hence
3. C the circuit now reduces to
1 1
V1 : V2 : C2 : C2
C1 C2
C2
V1 V
C2 C1
A B
4. B
2 0
C=
nb / a
2 0 2 0
= +
n 2R / R 2 2 V
n R 30 6
2R V 0 The resultant capacitance is + = 9F
4 4
2 0 6 0
= [1 + 2] = Parallel
n 2 n 2 8. (i) A (ii) B (iii) C
V V V V
5. A
V C2 C3
Maximum charge on first capacitor q1max = 160C C1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
154 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
9. B
Q1 Q2
10V Q0 =
A 2
0V
B
C 10V 10V 1
Initial energy U0 = CV2 = U1 = U2
0 A 8.85 10 0.1m 12 2 2
C= 1×10-9F But U1 + U2 U0
d 0.885 103
1 2 U1 + U2 = CV2
Energy stored = C1 C2 V
2
= 10-9×100 = 10-1 Joule
1 1 13. C
Ceq. V2 = 2CV2 CV –CV
2 2
CV –CV
Q Q Q Q
10. B Q 2
CV+
2
–CV–
2 2
1
V
2 O Q
O C V
A 3 2C
4 O
14. B
1,4 2,3
C CV 2CV
V 0 CV –CV
20 A 3CV
Ceq = 2C =
d
2V
11. B
12V 1 2 1 2
O Heat = 6CV2 – C(2V) CV
12
2 2
–q +q
C1 C2
+q –q 15. D
The two capacitance C1 & C2 behave as a series
6V
In series charge will be same arrangment as both the capacitors have equal
q q charge on them
12 – +6– =0
8 4 AK1
C1 = 0
q = 48 µC d/2
48 AK2
VC2 = 6V C2 = 0
8 d/2
C1C2
48 Ceq
VC1 = 12 V C1 C2
4
o AK1 o AK 2
12. D
d/2 d/2 2 A K K
o 1 2
o AK1 o AK 2 d K1 K2
C2 d / 2 d / 2
V C 1 Q0
V0
Correct statement 16. B
C1 and C2 are parallel So, V1 = V2
Negative W.D. by external agent
C1 = C2 and V1 = V2 Q1 = Q2
Initial change Q0 = CV Q2
Energy =
Now, Q1 = CV, Q2 = CV 2C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 155
17. B 20. C
Initially C KC
o A K
C 2 .5 Q1
d =K
Q2
The two capacitanes act as a paralllel connection
E
A / 2 K o A / 2 C C
C' o
d d
o A K o A KC
5F C eq
2d 2d K 1
2 .5 2.5 E
5 K KCE
2 2 Q2 = CeqV = , Q2' = EC/2
10 K 1
K 1 K 3
2.5 Q'2 EC
= = (K + 1)/2K
Q2 KCE
2
18. B K 1
We can express this arrangement as circuit
C 2C 21. C
2
(1,4) 3 As the potential difference is constant hence
we can say that
Q1 = 60 C = V × C ....(1)
C Now there is already 60 C on the capacitor.
When equivalent capacitance is calculated
More 120 C charge flows from battery. Hence
between 1 & 3 then
net charge on capacitor is
C 2C
2 Q2 = 180 C = V × KC ....(2)
(1,4) 3
Equation (2) / (1) 3 = K
22. C
C
2
2C 5C
C1 =
3
+C=
3 Ui =
1 60 10
6
When equivalent capacitance calculated 2 2 106
between 2 & 4. = 900 × 10–6 J
C 2C 2
(1,4)
2
3 Uf =
1 180 10
6
C 2 3 2 106
180 180 106
Ceq= 5C/3 = = 2700 × 10–6 J
62
2C 5C V = 30 volts
Hence C2 = +C=
3 3 Heat produced = 1800 × 10–6 J = 1800J
So C1 : C2 equal to 1 : 1.
19. C 23. C
The charge stored in the capacitor before and Energy in the capacitor increases.
after the dielectric is inserted is same so
Qi = CV 24. C
V A0
Qf = (KC) C0 , KDielectric Const.
8 d
Qi = Qf Cnew = 3C0
KCV
Hence CV = KA A
8 3 KK 6
2d d
K=8
25. C
Cnew = KC0 = 3×1F
Cnew = 3F
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
156 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
q0 600 106 1 e 2 q = q0 e t RC
dq q0 RC
i
t
e
dt Rc
After connectedd the wire charge Remains
on the capacitor P =i2 R
dE = i2 R dt
q=600×10-6 1 e 2 e2 Rq20 2 t RC
dE = e dt
q = 70c R2C2
2t
q20
28. D V0 dE Rc e
2
RC
dt
2
2t 50
-q20 R C RC
V0 E= 2 e
RC 2 25
= 4.7 J
31. A
q = cv
32. B
q q0 t Rc Just after switch S is closed capacitor act
e
c c as conducting wire.
v = v0 e t Rc 6
i1 = = 3A
v0 t 2
v0 e 100.1 i3 = i2 = 0
2
After long time capacitor act as open circuit
1
= e-t I1 = I3 = 0.6 A
2
1 33. A
Ln = Lne(–t) = (-t) At t = 0, capacitor work as l
2
t = Ln (2) = 0.693sec
29. B
V
3 q
I 2mA
1000
34. A
Time Constant of the circuit.
= Res.C = RC
R
v = v0 e t RC
1 t
e RC = e–2.2
3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 157
1. BD 3. BCD C
(5–q) + – (–5+q) Q1 = CV1
Q2 = CV2
q q Net charge = const. C
[B correct]
(q–15) – + (15–q) 2CV = C(V1 + V2)
C1V1 C2 V2 (1 3)5 V1 V2
V = C1 C 2 = = 2.5V (common V= [C correct]
4 2
potential) As charge flows energy will certainly be lost.
[D correct]
1 1 2 1 2
H = (C1 + C2)V2 – C1 V C2 V Net charge on the connected plates is equal
2 2 2
sum of initial charges because charge is
1 1 2
conserved.
= (1 + 3) (2.5)2 – (1 3)(5)
2 2
4. ABC
1
= × 4 [6.25 – 25] 1.5µf
2 q -q q
= 2 × 18.75 = 37.5 {W.D. by battery = 0} (300+q) - +
V1 q
+ - -(360+q)
150V V
2. ABCD q– 2 + 120V
–2µf V3
Initially –(300+q) 360+q
Q -Q q
0 A V1 + V2 + V 3 = 0
C 0 Q -Q 0
d Q1 Q2 Q3
C1 + C2 + C3 = 0
Q
V
C 300 q q 360 q
d + + =0
2 1.5 3
Qd
0 A 900 3q 4q 720 2q
Finally 0
6
Q +Q –Q
9q = –1620
C1 C2 q = –180
Q1 = 120C
Q/2 Q/2 –Q/2 3Q/2 Q2 = 180C
–3Q/2 Q/2
Flow of charge from right to left through A
V1 V2 5. ABCD
A C B
2 0 A kQ kQ
C1 C2 (a) Vi = V0 =
A 3R 3R
Qd (b) Earthing means V = 0
V1
2.2 0 A kq' kq
(c) 0 q' = –q/3
3Q d R 3R
V2
2.2 0 A (d) energy between the spheres increases.
d
V V1 V2
0 A
Vf Vi
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
158 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
9. ABCD
(A) As from figure VA = 20V
(B) 4(VA – VB) + 2(VD – VB)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 159
R3= 1
R2= 2
= 10V
In XYW
CV –CV A B C
Just afterclosing switch DC will act as wire
i = 10 A
Q = const. After t = DC will be open circuit
t = 1 i
CV
5V
2
Q Q max=5 × 0.1
(C) = 5V 1V
2C 10V
k 2C2 V 2 1 i = 10
= = KCV2
2KC 2
20. BD
CV –CV
1 2 3
Q2 C2V 2 1 CV 2
= = = 100 60
2C 2KC 2 K i1
120 0
Now insert dielectric i2
–CV
CV 80 60
Req = 3
16. ABD i = 40 A
i1 = i2 = 20A
CKE CE At t = capacitor acts as open circuit
Charge stored in C1 = VC1
= 20 × 2c
= 40 c
CE (k – 1)
21. AC
C2V1 = C2V2
17. ACD
q
1 qmax
V = const. Ui = CV2
2
1
2
1 1
Energy = C'V2 = kCV2 = k(Ui)
2 2 t
O
Qf = CV = kQi
As qmax for both is same hence A is corrent
18. BC As C1V1 = C2V2 Hence EMF's of the cells may
30C0 = (C0 + KVC0).V be different
22. D
R2C2 > R1C2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
160 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
5. 60 c, A to B
8
1. F
3 24µC
1 120 120
1
A C B Qf =120
1 y 60V 144µC
x
60µC 2µC
60 60
2
36µC
60V Qf =180 144µC
Ceq in ACB = 2/3 F
Ceq between x & y = 2/3 + 2 = 8/3 F
O O
2. 3Q/2C 6. 150 J
–3Q/2
V = 3Q\2C 4µF
After closing switch only change in charge is at 3µF
1
× 3 × 102 = 150 µJ
3. 0.05 Nt 2
Force between the plates is given by
2 A 7. 10 C
or
2 0 10 10 0
E 1 106 105
F= q
2 2
10
E
[ as electric field is due to charges on a
2
0.1 10 0
single plate is to be written] N 0.05Nt
2
10µC
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 161
P q
1 1 1 q2 d
V1 : V 2 = : 13.
3C C 2 0 A
V1 : V 2 = 1 : 3
1 2Q 2Q
V1 = V' V' = 8V q –q
4
4 1 8 4
V3 : V 4 = : V =
15C C 4 15
V4 = 30V q2
Energy =
2C
10. C
1 1 1 1 14. 9J
C C 2C 4C ...... Energy in the capacitor is Released as
eq
1 1 (20 10 6 )2
heat = × (0.1)
= 1 2 4 0 (0.2 0.1)
C 1 ....
2
1 9 10 9 4 10 10
1 C = = 9 Joule
C eq = 1
Ceq =
2
6 .4
C 1
2
15. yes
C/2 0 A 0 A C
Ci = = C, Cf = =
d 2d 2
During pulling charge remains same.
C/2
Ceq = C 25 0 A
16.
24 d
C 3C
32
11. F
23
C
A 2C 4C
8/3 8/9 0A
Let =C {Area = A/2}
2d
B
C 32/9 3C2 (2C)(4C)
Ceq = +
A C 3C 2C 4C
3 4 25 0 A
B = C+ C=
4 3 24 d
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
162 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
d
Charge on capacitor B = 100 C.
i When they are connected with dielectric
removed from A the capacitor.
Capacitance of A now becomes 1 F.
d
R
A 0 A.15
Ci = = 15C = 15µF,, 1500 + – –1500
d
q/C qAd q
i= = d Ak = K 0A
R 0 0 Cf = C = 1µF
d
Q remains constant
100V + –
Qnet = Ceq × Vcommon 1µF
18. Yes,Yes
dielectric slab 1500 + 100 = 2V
V = 800 Volt
22. C is increases
0 A sec(y / 2d)
dc = 24. 0.2 A, 20 c
dy
All the elements are in series V 10
I= = 0.2A
R 50
d
1 dy y Q = CV
Hence C n =
eq
0 0 A
cos
2d Q = (2F) × 10
Q = 20C
d
2d y
= A sin
0 2d 0 25. = 3 RC
Req = 3R
0 A = 3RC
Ceq =
2d
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 163
26. 30. 0
i 70 = 7 × Vf
Vf = 10V
1 2 1 (50)2 1
2
Heat = 2 2 (20) 2 5 2 7 (10) = 0
L
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
164 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. Proof
C12V(C2 C3 ) C1C2C3V
For Ist contact 3. q 1= q =q 3
C1C2 C2C3 C1C3 2 C1C2 C2C3 C3C1
Qq q
C1 C2 –q
C2 +q
–C1V –
Q qmax C1
Potential of plate V0 +C1V
+
C1V – q –q
C1 C2
C3 +q
C2 Qq Final
qmax Q . Initial
C1 Q q
q q C Vq q
1 V
C3 C2 C1 C1
5 0 A 1
2. (i) ; 1 1 V
3 d q V q
C1 C 2 C 3 1
1
1
C1 C 2 C 3
4 0 AV 2 0 AV
(ii) Q3 = , Q5 =
3 d 3 d
4. Proof
Equivalent circuit
2 k
(i) Eb . (E will be maximum at the surface
a
1 2 V 5 4
+ – + – of inner cylinder)
C
V0 2 – b b
O Vab 2 k n a Eb n
3 + a a
3 4 for V max
+ –
dV b
0 a
da e
V0
dx
2C C
5 4 m
x
C 5C
3 3
V0 V V0 V V 2 k
2V0 3 V (ii) E b
C C C a
2 dv 2x dx 1
V V0 b
3 1 2
q3 C( V0 V ) ( V0 – 0) C
E 2
a
0E dv
b 2
0 a Eb 2 2
2 4
C ( 2V0 V ) C 2 V0 V0 CV0 2x dx 2 0 a Eb b
2 x n
3 3 a 2 a
dE b
2 0 a
q5 C V CV0 da 2
3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 165
5. 69 C
3kq12 4q
x x x x 6. UI = where q 1 = – ; U II =
10 r 25
10V
3 F
3 F
(y – 5) 6 F 2K(q q1)2 / 35 r
5V
3 F
k q kq1 k q3
y –5 0
O 5V r2 r1 r3
6 F 6 F
2q q1 2 q 3
0
10 O O 5r r 7r
10V
5x 2y 5 ...(1)
( y 5 x ) 3 ( y x ) 3 ( y 10 ) 6 0
4 y 2x 25 ...(2)
r3 q3
q
from eq. (1) & (2) q1
r2
r1
10x – 2x = – 10 + 25
8x = 15 x = 15/8, and
4 y 15 / 4 25
115
y
16 k q1 k q k q3
0
After Connection r3 r3 r3
x x x x
q1 q q3 0
3
3 F 10V
–5 (x –10) 6 F 4
q1 q
5
3 F
25 21
– q q q1
25
–5 1
O (3.5r 2.5r)
O O 5V CII 40 21
q
6 F 6 F
3.5r 2.5r 3.5r
2.5r
25
35 r
10 O O 4k
10V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
166 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
C1 C2
400
7. – C
7
Equivalent Circuit :
5 F 5 F 5 F
300V
Q Ceff V0
20V C eff V0 kp 2
V1 V0 300 75 V
C1 k g kp 8
5
Ceq C eff V0 6
3 V2 300 225 V
C2 8
Charge distribution
– + – + – +
V1 75
100/3 C 100/3 C 100/3 C
E1 15000 V / m
d 0.5 10 2
V2 225
E2 45000 V / m
20V
d 0.5 10 2
Q
5 1 2
A
5
5 0 (12)
× 300 = 9000 0 8 10 7 c / m2
8 0.5 10 2
5 5
1 1
9. W= C0 V02 1 –
2 K
20V
25 1 (CV )2 1 1
C eq WE CV 2 CV 2 1
7 2 2 KC 2 K
Charge distribution :
q 10. 12 volt
Q = CV0
– + – + – +
– + + – Qq q
200 200 500
V [V is the final voltage]
100 100 C CV
7 7 7 7 7
(Q q) V q (CV0 CV 2 ) V CV 2
20V V V0 V 3 V 2 V 2 V V0 0
400 1 1 4 V0 1 25
q C
7 V = 12 V
2 2
4 4
8. (i) 1.5 × 10 V/m, 4.5 × 10 V/m, (ii) 75 V,
225 V, (iii) 8 × 10– 7 C/m2 3 1 1
A 0k g A 0k p 11. (i) CV 2 ; (ii) – CV 2 (K – 1) ; (K + 2)
C1 C2 2 2 6
,
d d
(K – 1) CV2 ;
2
A 0
kg kp 1 n 2
C1 C 2 d A 0 (k g k p ) C eq V Heat
C eff 2
C1 C 2 A 0 d (k g k p )
(k g k p )
d
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 167
1 0SK1
3CV 2 Heat 12. C
2 2d
1
KCV 2 1
2 CV 2
C 2 1 1 dx
V O
dC sk 0 1
1 cos 2 d . x
1
CV 2 K 1
2
2C
0 . s.k 1[1 sin x [
(K–1).CV dc d
dx
dx
1
CV 2 K 1 W.D. x
2
Slowly means. Heat loss is zero
1
Initial ( 2C KC) .V 2 1 dx
2
0 sk1 x
KC 2 cos 2
KCV 4 2a
1
sec 2
x . dx
2 0 sk 1 4 2d
1
CV 2 (K 2)
2
d
d
2CV tan x
0 sk1 4 2d 0
From Charge conservation
1 CV
13. q = CE 1 + 2
e e
2C
CV CV
e e
1 3C(K 2)2 V 2 C C
Final energy (K 2)2 V 2
2 32 6
2 K 2 (K 2 ) 2 (R1+R2)
at t = R1C
W.D. = CV 2 6
1 2
CV (K 2)(K 1)
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
168 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
q
t dq dt
q CE 1 e (R1 R2 )C
q
i1 R V
CV q RC
CV
C
2
1 t
t1 q CV 1 e RC
CV ( R1 R 2 )C 2
CE 1 e
e
t
q CV 1 RC
q 1 e
2 2 2
V
t 1 (R1 R 2 ) C n 1
Ee
15. R
( t t1 ) In an R – C decay circuit
(R1 R 2 ) C
q CE 1 e
E E t
I= – t/RC ln I = ln –
R e R RC
Putting t 2 R 1C R 2 C R 1 C (R 1 R 2 ) C , we
When value of R is halved then slope
get
become more negative & the intercept
V
1n 1
increases. Hence R option represents the
Ee
q CE 1 e variation of logeI with time.
V
16. V= (1 – e–2t/RC)
1 E 2
e 1 CV
CE 1
e CE 1 e 2 Ans. This is an example of R – C circuit in parallel.
e
The distribution of charge and current in
circuit at an instant t is shown in fig.
CV 1 – t /RC A B D
14. q 1 – e
2 2
(I–I1) I1
+q
i R (i i1 ) R V R C
–q
(1) (2)
2 i R i1 R V ...(i)
G R I F E
q
(i i1 ) R ...(ii)
2C In loop (1) (ABFGA),
. (I – I1) R – IR = 0
or – IR + I1R – IR = 0
i R
or – 2IR + I1R = 0
i – i1 i1
CV
2 I1R
V R q 2C
CV
I =
2R
2
q
In loop BDEFB, – + (I – I1) R = 0
C
from (1) & (2)
q q I1R
or – + I1 R = 0
2 i1 R i1 R V C 2R
2 C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 169
q I1R 2 I1R E
or – + R=0 Loop EABCE: = 2(i – i1) + (i – i1 + i2)
C 2R R
E
q I1R = 3i – 3i1 + i2 ….. (1)
or – + =0 R
C 2
E
Loop EADCE: = i1 + (i1 – i2)
q IR 1 R
or – =
2 C 2 E
= 2i1 – i2 ….. (2)
dq R
But I1 =
dt q2
Loop EADBCE: E = i1R + (i – i1 + i2) R +
q R dq C
– =
2 C 2 dt E q2
= i + i2 + ….. (3)
R RC
2RC dq
or C – 2q =
2 dt 1 i E
From 2, i1 = 2 ….. (4)
q t 2 R
dq dt
or 0 C 2q =
0 RC Substituting (4) in (1) to find i in terms of i2,
EC 6dt
ln q 2 =– + K (integration constant)
6 7RC
R i1–i2 D R i1
Apply the boundary condition to find K. At
i2 i1 time t = 0, q2 = 0.
C C A CE
i K = – ln
i–i1 6
Therefore, the time varying charge
B i–i1
R i–i1+i2 2R equation is:
CE 6t
E
q2 =
6 1 e(7 RC )
The maximum charge that can be stored by
Writing the potential drop equations for the capacitor = CE/6.
various loops in the circuit, Time constant = 7RC/6.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
170 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 171
t
In2 = In2 Potential at 9F = 2 volt
10
charge q2 = 18C
t = 10 sec.
9. B total q = 42 C
In one time constant kq 9 109 42 10 6
Voltage becomes 0.37 times maximum voltage E= 2 = = 420 N/C
r 900
V = 0.37 × 25 = 9.25
So time is between 100 sec to 150 sec.
14. A
10. D
Q1 = 120 C1 (i)
for
Q2 = 200 C2 (ii)
Now, (1) = (2) 1
Q1 = Q2 C=
4
120 c1 = 200 c2
net 8 line
3 c1 = 5 c2
so 32
11. C 15. B
Q
C=90PF
A
CV
A
kA Ed
0 .
d A
= 0 KE 20V
= 8.85×10 -12
×2.2×3×10 4 C' = kc
= 6×10-7 C/m2 J
C' = × 30 = 150 nF
3
12. D = 1V
Charge
= 150 × 20 PC
= 3000 PC
= 3nC
Q2
1
' = 1
k
C
1mf 3mp
3
' = 3nc 1
5
13. B
2
' = 3nc
5
6nC
' = = 1.2 ns
5
+ –
8v
Potential at 4F = 6 volt
charge q1 = 24C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
172 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
CV R1R 2
Qmax = R R × R2, Req = R R
1 2 1 2
R1R 2 2
For fig. 3 R eq
2. B R1 R 2 3
4V = 12 V= 3 volt 2
Ceq = C1+ C2 = 6 6 4
and 3V = 9 volt 3
q = 36C
q = CV (1 – e–t/RC) 4. C
36 C = 4f × 12 (1 – e–t/) When S open
V1 V2
q1 q2
3V V
3f 6f
9 0
= 4 × 2.5 = 10
3 0
= (1 – e–t/10)
4 q1 = 18f q2 = 18f
1 t 1 1
e–t/10 = – = – ln 22 ;
t = 13.86 sec. V1 : V2 = :
4 10 3 6
V1 : V2 = 2 : 1
3 D 2
V1 = × 9 = 6 volt ; V2 = 3 volt
3
9f 6V 36f
9f
9 27f 0
3 6
6
0
R1R 2 2 When S closed
For fig. 1 R eq
R1 R 2 3
5. A
C1C2 4 4 2 8
Ceq Þ
C1 C2 3 3 3 9 d 2d
1 – Vt Vt 1
6f = 3 + 3 =
C eqn 2 0 A
2 0 A 0 A
d 4d
– Vt 2Vt
3 3
1 1 5d
vt
3 C eqn = 2 A 3
0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 173
8. C
6 0 A 6 0 AR
Ceqn = =
(5d 3Vt) (5d 3Vt)
V x 0
6. 2 sec
1m 4 F
A B
3 2 4 20
Q Q 0 (1 e t / RC ) Ceq =
3 2 4 9
16 Q = 40 Q (1 – e t / 4 )
t = 2 sec 80
v = q/c = 9 = 36 Volt
20
Apply charge conservation
7. D
When connected to 1 (x – 36)4 + 3 x + 2 x = 0
x = 16.
1
Energy stored 2 10 6 v2 v2 J Q2 = C2V2 =3 × 16 = 48 C
2
9. BD
Hint.
+
V
–
2CV0 0
+ V'
–
When connected to 2
2CV0 =2CV’
V’ = V0
+ Final situation
+
V
– –
CV0 –CV0
–CV0 CV0
If common potential is V' then from charge
C1 C2
conservation (8 + 2) V' = 2V
V
V' = 5 10. A,D
0 A
Total final energy C0
d
1 V2 1 v2 v2
= 2 + ×8× =
2 25 2 25 5
v2 v2 / 5
Energy dissipated = 100
v2
4v 2
= 100 = 80 %
5v 2 q = C0V
q C0
q1 k
q2 = 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
174 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
E1 4 7
1 =
E2 = 1 3 3
k 2 (K 2) 7C
C2
C= C + C = C0 3
3 0 3 0 3
C (K 2) 13. B
=
C1 K First we have to find the charge on the
capacitor 9f and 9f.
11. C,D
I0 1 1 (3 9) 4 12 4
V0 = = = Ceq 3
c 50 .0 20 10 6 10 10 3 12 4 16
1 Charge on 4f; q4 = 8×3 = 24C
= = 100
10 2
V = 100 cos (t – /2) 24 9
Charge on 9f; q9 = = 18C
(9 3)
V = 100 sin t
q0 = CV = 20 × 10–6 × 100 Electric field at a distance 30m.
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin × (18 24) 10 6
6 E 9 109
30 30
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin
6
42 106
9 109
= 2 × 10 –3
sin 6 30 30
= –10–3 C E = 420 N/c
12. D
14. C
A
–V0 e=0
–
V0
+
+V0
A
C1 0 C
d Balls placed on +ve plate become positive
charge and move upward due to electric field.
These balls on colliding with negative plate
become negatively charged and move
opposite to the direction of electric field.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Capacitance | 175
qv
ma
d
V0=8V
qv
a
md
1 2
d at
2
1 qv 2
d t
2 md
1
t2
qv
qv
1
t2 By loop rule (vnet = 0)
v2
5 3 3 3
1 – – =0
t
1 r 1 r = 2
v
q r = 1.50
i
t
i 0 v2
16. B
Total energy dissipated
1 v 2 1
ED = E1 + E2 + E3 = c 0 3 = CV02
2 3 3
17. A
Energy stored in capacitor,
1
EC = CV2
2
Energy dissipated in the resistance,
ED = EC (by theory)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
176 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
MAGNETISM
1. A i1
on solving i 2
B at t = 0 2
at t = 0
di= = di 4. C
at t = t
B at t = t
2. B
Zero, because magnetic field due to each
wire will be cancelled by another wire. 0I 0I 0 I
Bnet =
bg bg
2 2 – 2 3 , Bnet = 12
3. C
i1 i2
5. C
4I
x
I
x 2d-x
M.F. will add
In b/w wire
B1 B1
0i 4 0i
i
B1 0 1
2 d
i
B2 0 2
2 d
B=
2x 2 2 d x b g
i1 i2 To find the minima
B1 B2
dB
0 =0
B1 B2 i1 i2
2 d dx
0 Which gives x = d/3.
10mT i1 i2 ...(i)
2 d
Hence there is a minima close to 1.
Now if i2 is reversed then B2 is
0
B1 B2 i1 i2 6. B
2 d
0 0i
30 i1 i2 ...(ii) B=
2 d 2r
(i) P
Now, r
(ii)
1 i1 i 2 B1 r2 4
3 i1 i2 B2 r1 3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 177
10. D
7. B
At point P
0i 1 LM1 OP i
P Add Add
N Q
i × × ×
i
2 x r x i
8. B r
11. B
The field due to arc at the centre is given by
0i
B=
4r a
Bnet =
0i1 i 2
+ 0 2
b g a
30°
4r 4 r 30°
i2
i i1 i
FG
0 i 2 sin 30 IJ FG 1 1 1 IJ
VA – VB = i1 R1 = i2R2
=
H
4 cos 30 K H a 2 a 3a K
R1 L1 0i 0i
or i2 = i1 R = i1 L = ln22 = ln4
2 2
4 3a 4a 3
i1
i2 = [L = r] 12. A
2
0 i1 0 i R/ 2
Bnet = + =0
4r 4r B=0
i.e. the field at the centre of the coil is zero 45°
and is independent of 2= 45°
1= 90°
9. C d=R
2
Due to first square
B1
0 I
1
1
4 0i FG 1 IJ
a 2
4
2
2 Induction of magnetic field =
4
R H
1
2 K
0 i 8 2
B1
a 2
4
2 13. A
Due to second square
0i 8
B2
4 (a ) 2
So net B B1 B2 B 3 ....
0i
2 1 2 8 1
a a 3a 2a ...... i i i
4 2
After solving this
0i 2 2 n2
B
a
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
178 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
15. B
× × × × 0 100 1
Bnet = 2
2 2
× × × ×
+
× × × × 5
= 4 10 5 T
× × × × 2 5
–
× × × ×
20. B
Eind = v B .dl
4
16. B 3
Behaves as solenoid
2
B = ni
5
B = 1
6
a
17. A
Magnetic field inside a
y
0 ir B due to (a), (1), (3), (5) is zero
cylinder = 2
4R x 0i i
k , B due to 4 = 0 k
z
B due to 2 =
R 0i 8R 16 R
r= B = ×××
2 4R
Top view
×× ××× ××
×× ××× ×× 0i 0i LMFG 1 1 IJ k 1 jOP
NH 2 4 K Q
–z ××× ××× ××× B due to 6 = j , Bnet =
××× ××× ××× 4 R 4R
i × × ×r/2
×× ×××
4R
e j
B 0 i k x × × ××× ××
×× ××× ××
× ××× ×
21. B
18. A Top view
F 1 × ×
E= 00 = 0i
q C2 B= ×
2x ×
F ×
B= ×
il due to this B ×
Hence the dimensions ×
0i ×
L2 Bout =
2r
are L2 T 2 T 2 =M0L0T0
Bin = 0
Dimensionless.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 179
22. B O 26. C
Figure shows infinitely, long, Magnetic field due to Arc i
straight, thin-walled pipe
carrying current I. Let P be B1 =
0i
4R
b
2 2 g
any point at a P
2
distance r from the axis OO1
of the pipe. Let B be magnetic
B1 =
0i
2R
b
g
field at P. Consider a closed
Magnetic field due to straight wire
circular path O1
passing through point P as shown in 0i
B2 = 2 sin
figure. From Ampere’s Circuital Theorem, 4Rcos
B.dl i
0
0i
B2 = tan
i = current enclosed by the closed path. 2R
Obviously, i = 0 Bnet = B1 + B2
2rB = 0 or B = 0
0i
Bnet = tan
2R
23. C
If we construct a big square whose 27. A
centre is on the wire and side is 2a, with 2
for each arc
PQR as quarter of its part, then B.dr over 8 4
R R3 B = 0
29. A
/2
/2
30. A
R mv
R=
qB
0i
B due to arc = . 1
4R q × 12 × 103 = m (106)2
2
0i m
B due to wire = .2 sin / 2 = 24 × 10–9
4R cos / 2 q
0i 24 10 –9 106
= 2 tan / 2 Bwire > Barce R= = 12 cm
4R 0.2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
180 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
31. B
1 4 16
m RH : RHe : R0 = : :
R 1 1 2
q
RHe : R O2 = 1 : 1
mP me 4mP
RP : Re : R = : : .
q q 2q
36. B
mv
R=
qB
-particle has maximum R, so the path
/s
followed is B. 1 sin 30° 1m
30°
33. B
mv
R= R v
qB
34. C
The direction of currents in a long straight
B = 0.104 T conductor XY and are AB of a square loop
ABCD are in the same direction.
V
V|| = 3 v So, there exists a force of attraction b/w
2 the two conductors which will be experienced
60°
by FAB as
V = v
2 0IiL
FBA
L
v is not parallel to B 2
2
Path of the proton is helical In the case of Y and arm CD, the direction of
mv currents are in the opposite direction.
radius = = 0.1 m
qB There exists a force of repullsion which will
2m be experience by CD as
T= = 2 × 10–7
qB 0IiL
FCD
3L
35. B 2
2
KEH = KEHe = KEO2
Net force on the loop ABCD is
2K
velocity of a particle = 0IiL 1 1
m Floop = FBA FCD 2 L / 2 3L / 2
mv 2Km
R= = 20Ii
qB qB Floop =
3
M
As K & B are constant R
q
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 181
38. C
R=p M1 M2 9
qB From (1) & (2) M M =
2Rsin = y2 x2 1 2 25
M1 17
2 R. x which gives =
= 2
y x 2 M2 8
y2 x2 2 x
y
2 +
x
2P y x 2 2 41. A
=
qB x y
Angle b/w B & A is zero
qB y 2FG IJ so = 0
P=
2 H
x
x
K
42. A
39. B = I
Torque on a current carrying loop is given by
mR 2
BiR2 =
MB 2
Hence does not depend on shape of loop.
2Bi
=
m
40. B
The formula for time period of a system of 2 10 4
= = 40 rad/s2
2
I
magnets is given by T = 2 MBH
43. B
Where I is moment of inertia M is magnetic mgsin = f mg sin
moment & B H is Horizontal component of f
f.R = i R2Bsin
magnetic field.
mgsin . R = i R2B sin
Now in the sum mg
M
position i.e. mg
when like poles N S B=
iR
N S
are together
44. B
I1 I2
T = 2 M M B = 3 .... (1)
1 2 H
×
In difference position i.e. when opposite poles
are together
N S B
S N
I1 I2
Then T= The force on upper segment is in direction
M1 M2 BH inside the plane of paper while on the lower
= 5 sec .... (2) segment it is perpendicular to plane of paper
coming outwards.
[As 12 oscillation in 60 sec means 1
oscillation in 5 sec.]
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
182 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
When we calculate r F the direction of 48. A
torque are as shown. The vertical On observing the hyteresis curve we observe
components cancel out leaving horizontal that for steel even after removing external
components in left direction. magnetic field the material remains magnetised
for a long time.
45. B
49. A
= 2n (2L) (2a) B sin30°
On increasing the magnetising field more
= 8 Ban I cos60°
domains are aligned in a ferromagnetic
material and hence its permeability also
46. A increases.
1
B
r3 50. B × ×
×
Top view ×
3
B1 3x 27 ×
0i ×
B2 x 1 B= B ×
2x ×
×
due to this
47. D mV
0i
in time dt Bout =
2r
q Bin = 0
i=
dt
v= 2gh
m . 2 gh = F.dt
q
m . 2 gh = ilBdt = lBdt
dt
m 2gh
q=
Bl
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 183
60°
2. A
0i
Magnetic field at centre of the ring
2R M.M. = i r2 = i × × 10–4 = × 10–4
As the three rings are mutually perpendicular. 0M
B= 1 3 cos2
Hence the magnetic field due to each one of 4r 3
them will be mutually to other. Hence 0 M
1 3 cos 2 60
magnitude of Bnet. B = 4
10
3
b g
3 0i 2 4
B= Ratio =
2R 13/ 4 7
6. D
3. C
d × d
r
0 i1 i2 i1 i2
B
Bnet a
2d 90
90
= 10 T .....(1)
r B
0 i1 i2 x
B
2d
Bnet = 2B sin
= 30 T .....(1)
2 0 ia 0 ia
from (1) & (2) i1 i2
2r. r r 2
i1
2
i2 7. C
4. B
net (zero)
= 0, = 45° i1
0i FG
1 IJ l
i2
B = 4 0
H2
,
K 45°
l i
20i
B=
8
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
184 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
8. C dM Y
9. C
By using Ampere’s Circuit law 2D view of toroid
B × 2r1 = 0Ienc x axis gives
r1
Ienc = br × 2rdr Nd2I 1
0 Pm sin d Nd2I
4 2
0br12
B=
3 12. B
In this situation equivalent current is
flowing along the curved surface of the
10. D
cylinder as shown in figure.
0nI
B sin sin
2 dx
For Present case, and 2
2 4
R
0nI 1
So, B = 1
2 2
(a) For the shown element the charge is, dq
= ×2Rdx. This element is equivalent to
11. C
current carrying cylinder with current along
Take an element of length rd containing the curved surface given by,
N
. rd turns as shown in figure. Its dq
r i v0dx
2R
v0
N 2
magnetic moment is dM = d . d I
4
Required current per unit width is,
normal to the plane of cross section. We
resolve it along X & Y axis. The moment along i
K= v0
Y axis becomes 0 while that along dx
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 185
B = 0K = 0v0 x d
0 Jdr Jdr
(C) At any outside point, B = 0 B 2 0
d 2 x 2
2
13. B
0 J
(2x) 0Jx
0i 6 7 2
(a) B 0 î [10 10 10 ] î = 0
2 ( 2) for point P outside the plane (x>d)
B = (10 6 ) 2 (10 6 )2 10 6 2 T
d
(b) 0Jdr
BB =0Jd when x > d
d
2
y
B0 î
15. A
z
x
I
=
2 R Behave as
× wire
dI = . Rd
0 Rd
B0 î dB =
45º 2 R
z
/2
0 i
B = dB sin , = 02
0
2 4 R
z
/2
B0 (k̂ ) 0i
B = dBcos =
0 4 2 R
0 î
(c) B0 + = 10–6 × 5 î
2(0.5) 0i
Bnet = 2
4 2 R
14. C
16. B
The linear current density along the plane of
z
sheet at a distance r from the central plane i
of thickness dr is given by,
e
= b2 a 2 ,
j Bdl 0 ir
I Jldr
Jdr
l l 0 ic 2
B(2c) = b 2 a 2
e j a
P c
x
r 0 ic
dr
e
B1 = 2 b 2 a 2
j
The magnetic field at point P due to this
elemental sheet at a distance of x (<d) from when – is taken
median plane is, B2 = 0
0 0 Jdr Bnet = B1
dB
2 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
186 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
17. A
B A
BP.d l = BP .d l = 40
A C
B C
BQ.d l = BQ.d l = – 120
A B
r
dr
C A
and BR .d l = BR .d l = 120
B C
di = br.2 pr.dr
BP 1 BP 1
As B I so B 3 and B 3
Q R
B = 2r = iin
C 1 A
z
So BP.d l C B .d l = 50
z z
r B 3 Q
B
C A
0 2 br 3 br 2
B(2r) = , B= 0 B.d l A
B.d l B.d l B.d l = 0I
B C
3 3
I = 13A
2 bR 3 0 bR 3
(b) B.2r2 = 0 =
3 3r2
20. A
18. B
F q V B ma
B.d l = 0(i1+i3+i6+i8) (as i2,i4,i5 and i7, do 1
S t a 2
2
not lie inside the loop)
= 0(1+3–6–8) i0 = –100i0
21. B
The loop encloses current I only and
19. C
direction of current is positive in accordance
From the symmetry of figure, and using the
fact that B I we can find the line integral to Right handed screw rule. So
B.d l = 0I.
of BP, BQ & BR over various parts of closed
loop. From given information. 22. C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 187
27. A
23. C y
B
90°
V × ×
53° 2mv
v0 x y=
qB
53°
R z
R
d
28. B
3mv mv Because it is a closed loop so Fres = 0.
d= ,R=
5qB qB
29. B
24. C
K.E of -particle = work done by electric y
force.
F1 a
1 2
25
qEx0 = m5 , x0 = 2E
2 0
×
a
F
F
25. D x
F2 = 0
F1 = a 2 ij
3mV0
t=
qE0
30. B
26. B m
T0 2 0.57 s
As the radius of the circle is constantly 61B
decreasing hence we conclude that B is
= –MB = –iBl2
mv
increasing as r = . M/4
qB
M/4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
188 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
33. B
M l2 Ml 2 Ml 2 Ml 2 Ml 2
I= =
4 12 4 12 4 4 4 4 6 Magnetic Intensity B = BH tan
M
= 2 = 0.57 s 34. B
6iB
(Theoretical)
31. B
35. A
Q Q Q
= The field produced by magnet if it is kept
Area Rh h2 tan
along last of deflection magnetometer
x 1 0 M
r tan is while when kept along south the
4 d 3
r = x tan 0 M
magnetometer is .
4 d 3
dq = [2r dx] x
dq Magnetic field is proportional to tan
r
= [2 x tan dx] dx 1
if tan becomes half, then = tan-1 .
2
i = dqf = dq R
2
36. A
dm = i Ar = i. r2 = ix2 tan2
eL
dm = x3 tan3 × 2 . dx . . =
2 2me
h L = nh
dm tan3 . x dx
M=
0 e
=
2me (nh)
.tan3 h4 .Q /(h2 tan).h4 tan3
M
4 4 n where n = 1,2,3 ............
Q.h 2 tan 2
M 37. A
4
W = – MB (cos 2 – cos 1)
32. A FB
38. A
= 2n
(Theoretical)
v = r = 2nr
Fext
B
FB = Fext = iB0
Wn = 1 = Fext . 2r = 2iB0r
Wn = n = nWn = 1 = 2 i B0rn
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 189
39. D 40. B
Using formula r = (1 + Xm) Due to opposite spin of electrons in
Where r = relative permeability of medium. diamagnetic material an atom does not
= 0 (H + I) [As Xm = I/H]
= 200 × 80 A-m2
r = 14.9 ~ 15
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
190 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
3. A, B, C 7. A,B,C
The variation of B with r for solid current
E
x = m/sec. z = m/sec carrying wire (uniform distribution of
B CR
current across the cross - section of wire) is
shown below.
1
y = m/sec.
0 0 B
4. A, B, C, D
(A) Direction of magnetic field produced due 1
r
to the two wires on x axis have opposite
direction Bnet = 0.
r
R
B
(B) a × × b 8. A,B,C
Use the concept as illustrated by diagrams.
B
a & b have only z component.
Bnet
(C)
× ×
Bnet has only y component as z component Act as South Act as North
Pole current is Pole current is
gets cancelled
clockwise and clockwise
(D) Bx = 0 in net B
P will acquire North pole due to induction
Due to magnetic material of tube induction
5. A, D y y
effect is more prominent and initial force of
1
0i attraction increases.
B= B 2
2 2 l
As direction x x 9. B,C,D
of magnetic Use principle of super position and concept
field is to z of magnetic field due to thick cylinder.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 191
10. B,D
0R 3
outside the conductor is ; B2 =
dx 3r
Current flowing per unit length = = v
dt A plot of B as a function of r is shown in
l figure.
12. A,D
2m T1
By Ampere’s law B + B = 0v T= ;T =1
qB 2
0v
B=
2 mV sin 30 mV sin 60
r1 = ; r2 =
qB qB
11. A,D
B 1
The prob- b=
3
lem can be 3
solved by Pitch 1
= vcos30° T1
using the Pitch2 = vcos60° T2
Ampere’s
abc = 1
law : R
r
c= 3
B.d l I 0 enc
a = bc
Where the enclosed current Ienc is given by
13. C,D
Ienc J.dA ( r)(2rdr)
W. D. by mag. field is zero
(a) For r < R, the enclosed current is
r
e
Fmg = q v B j
2r3
Ienc 2r2dr
0
3
14. B,C
Applying Ampere’s law, the magnetic field at
Work Done by magnetic force = 0
P1 is given by
20 r3 0 2 e
f = q vB j
B1(2r) or B1 = r
3 3
15. A,B
The direction of the magnetic field B1 is tan-
gential to the Amperian loop which
encloses the current.
(b) For r > R, the enclosed current is :
R
2r3
Ienc 2r2dr
0
3
In order to reverse the direction of electron
it should of electron it should turn back taking
20R 3
which yields B2(2r) = a circular path. The necessary centripetal
3
force will be provided by magnetic force on
Thus, the magnetic field at a point P 2 the moving electron.Electron can turn if
Fcentripetal is in x-y or x-z plane
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
192 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
2. Zero 5. 0.10 mT
Since the directions of current in two halves Magnetic induction at the centre of the
are opposite and the magnitude is same, the rectangular frame is the sum of the magnetic
resultant intensity will be Zero. fields produced by the four sides of the
square. This field may be calculated w.r.t.
the given Figure as below
1/2
l
l
r
1/2
3. 4 105 T 0 2I
B 2. (sin 15° + sin 15°)
The field produced due to one side AB is 4 d cos 15°
0 I 2I
B= (sin1 + sin2) Here 1 = 60 = 2 and
4r (sin 75 sin 75°)
d cos 75°
r = l/2 cot 60°
and there are three sides Total induction 0I
or B (tan15 cot15)
d
3 107 1 2 3 3 3
4.5 10 2
2 2 2 20 I 2 2 4 10 7 5 2
=
d sin 30° 0.16 1
3 107 2 3 i.e. B = 0.10 mT
B 4 105 T
4.5 10 2
6. 2B
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 193
0i
B2 =
2R
0 I 2
8. B
4 b a 2R = 2R’ × 2
0 I 0i 1 3
B2 (2 ) 12.
and ...(2) 8 R R'
4 a
Resultant magnetic field strength at the point 0i
O is given by B=
8R
B = B1 + B2
from the above in the
0 I 2 given Ques.
i.e. B ...(3)
4 b a
LM
0i 1 3 OP
B=
8 R R'N Q
9. 5 × 10–4 T towards west
N
X 0I 1 1
13.
W E 4 R1 R 2
Y
facing west
0i 0i
Bnet = 4 R 4 R
S 1 2
0 20 16
for X B=
2 16 10 2 0I
–4 14.
= 4 × 10 T (East) 4 R 3
0 25 18 B
for Y B= 2 A
2 10 10
i
i
= 9 × 10–4 T (West)
C D
10. 0 0 i 30 i
B1 sin60
4 2Rsin30 B R
Bnet = 0 0 i 0 i
B2 sin30
4 2Rsin60 8 R 3
x x 0 i
Bnet B1 B2
4 3 R
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
194 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
z
B. dl = From formula
ne A Vd = i
i
Vd =
× × neA
18.
iB
22.
An
From formula
19. 1.3 ×10-4T
qiB iB
N = 10 N = 10 F = qVd B, = ,F=
neA An
4 cm
4 cm
1A
1A iB
23.
Ane
6 cm
qE = qVdB
10 0 1 16 8 4 10 4 E = VdB
B1 =
2 10 4
LM 16 36 PO 3/ 2 =
b52g 3/ 2
iB
N10 10 Q
4 4 =
neA
= 0.26 × 10–4 T
10 0 1 100 i Bd
B2 = = 1.5 × 10–4 24.
2 4 Ane
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 195
2B2q2 m F 0i1i2
h= q = 2gh
2m2g B 2
10 10 3
z z
r2
dw 0 i1i 2 dr
= 2 10 3 q = 15 C
(20 10 2 ) 0.1 2 r
r1
i W 0 i1i 2 r2
0 iJ0 d
27. tan –1 (–k ) l
=
2
ln r
1
2h
dF
h
dF
so dFnet = 2 cos J0 0 iqv
x 30.
dx 2 a
d
J dx h
0 0 0 i1 i 2 q
= 2i
F= . , id = . v
2 x 2 h2
x 2 h2 2 a
q
d/ 2 i= .v
2 i 0 J0 h dx
Fnet =
2 x
0
2
h2
F 0iqv 0 iqv
,F=
2a 2 a
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
196 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
31. 10 k I
n=
Force on electron due to electric field is in e
+y direction. For undeviation force due to No. of e– in 1 sec.
magnetic field should be in -y direction.
change in momentum in 1 sec. = nmv force
Hence by right hand thumb rule the magnetic
field should be in –z direction. mEI
=
Be
Magnetude : qE = qvB
5 107
B= = 10 T 0II' C 1 1
5 106 34. – to the left
2 a b
3mv 2
32.
4 qa F1
(0, a) ĵ
F4 c
F2
î
(2a, 0)
(a)
a
k̂ F3
2v
1 1 F1 = F3
qE 2a = m (2v)2 – mv2
2 2
0II'C 0II'C
F4 = ; F2 =
2 2a 2b
3mv 2 3mv
qE ,E=
2 .2 a q 4a Fnet = F4 – F2
3mv 3 0II'C 1 1
=
(b)
4a 2 a b
3mv 3
F.v = qE v =
4a dB q
35. t=m , where = sin–1 if d < R
qB 2mV
(c) zero
; T / 2 if d > R
Zero (because angle b/w f & v is 90°)
mv 2mqv
r
qB qB
mEl
33.
Be 2m
T
eE = evB qB
E angle = t
v=
B
2
t
I = ne nos of e– 1 sec. T
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 197
T a2
t
2 = î B 120 1 2(a2 cos30º ) cos60º ĵ
2 180 2
If d < R
d sin dqB
sin , 2 3
2mqv = î Ba ĵ
R 3 4
2
t .t
T 38. 2s
T 2m 1 m I
t T 2
2 qB 2 aB MH
M
36. At angle Magnetic moment of each part =
3
B = MB cos = i l2 B cos
mg = mg /2 sin xy I
& Moment of inertia of each part =
3
net i l 2B cos – mg / 2 sin
Magnetic moment of combination (M’)
/2
= M and I’ = Moment of inertia of combination
M
w net
d 0
0
mg
I
B 3× = I.
3
( K = 0)
I' T'
Bil2 sin 0 / 2 + mg cos 0 / 2 0 T ' 2 1
2 M 'H T
Bil2 = mg /2
mg
B=
2i 39. decrease by 15°
I tan I tan 45° ...(1)
1
0I 2 tan or = 30°
= 2 3 3
4R 3 •
60º Decrease = 45° – 30° = 15°
0I (2) •
Bres = 3 (1)
2R 3
•
qV 0I
F = q (VB) = [3 3 ]
6a
(b) = M B MB( ĵ ) = î AB( ĵ )
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
198 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
8 2 0l 3
1. 4. 1
2 4r 2
0 I I I 4 0I
B= . 0 2 .R 0 . r
4R 2 4R 4R / 2
2
r=
I2
0 i 3 0 i
0 I 0 I 0 I (o,d) B=
x 4 R 2 4 R
B'
2r 2 2 4 I1
F
(Fneed)max = + Fr
2 +
0i
3.
j–i F/2 fr
2a
=
F
2
1 3
y = 0.88 N 30º .
J
(0,0,-a) x I z
x
0i ˆ ˆ
Bnet =
2a
ji
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 199
7. v x 0I1I2 0 i1 i 2
n 3 F n 3
3 2 4
v
2
2m
T=
qB I2 L2 a 2
V
10. F 0 ln
2 a
2
–k , zero
T = 0.1
2
× ×
V 2m 2mK r
. = = 0.1
2 qB qB
(90 )
x dx
mv 2
. = 0.1 B
2 qB × × B
–3
B = 4.7 × 10 T
dF = idx . 2B cos . = idx . 2
2 0 i
8. 0 i x 0 i2 x
3 a . = 2 .dx
2r 2
a x 2 a2 x 2
0I1I2
9. ln (3) along – ve z direction
4
2 a2
tan = y/a dF = i2 dy B sin
0 i2 x 0 i2 t dl
y = a tan dF i 2 dy
0 i1
sin
=
0
a2 x 2
.dx =
a
t2
2a sec
dy = a sec2d
a2 + x2 = t2
0 i2 2 a2
i i sin cos
Now dF 0 1 2 .a sec2 d 2x dx = 2t dt = 2 n 2
2a a
y II case zero B | |
i2 0 I0 3b
30° a 11.
2 ( a 2 b 2 )
60° x
i1
z d a2 b2
Bvertical = (BR – BT) cos
0I0 2 2
dy dF = 2d cos sin t 3 – sin t – 3
y
a
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
200 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
S B2
R b T B1
a B1'
= 2R + B'2
d
0IR (2R–b)
BR
2d
In y-axis
0IT
BT
2d
0 j R 2 0 j a 2
( i), B 2
B1 = 2( 2R )
0I0 2 2 2 b 2 ( 2R )2
cos sin t cos cos t sin –
2d 3 3
at angle from y-axis.
0I0 2 0 j R2 a4 R a2
cos 2 cos t sin = 2 2 sin
4 2 2
2d 3 b 4R 2 b 2 4R 2
0 I0 3
BVertical cos 2 cos t 0 j R2 a4 a 2R 2R
2 d 2 = 2 .
2
4 b 4R 2 2 2
b 4R b 4R 2
2
I 1 b 3
= 0 j R 2 (b 2 4R 2 ) 4a 2 8a 2R 2
00 .
2 cos t =
a 2 b2 a2 b 2 2 b 2 4R 2
0I0b 3
(B vertical ) amp 0 j R2b2 4(R4 a4 ) 8a2R2
2(a 2 b 2 ) =
2 b2 4R2
B B1( î ) B 2 sin ( î ) B 2 cos ( ĵ )
0 J a2 R
12. (a) B = –
2 2R – b 2 ,
2R b
B1 B2 î B2 ĵ
2 2
b (2R) b (2R)2
2
1 a2
(b) Bx = 0 JR 4 – 2
2
4R b
0 j a 2R R j a 2b
= 2 î 0 ĵ
b 4R 2 4 2 b 4R 2
2
0 J a 2b
By = –
2 4R2 b 2 in x direction
J 2 2
0JR 0Ja
B B1 'B 2 ' ( ĵ ) = 2(2R) 2(2R b) ĵ
b
0 J R a2
ĵ
2 2 2R b
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 201
kq2
m 2r .... (1) a a
r2 D A
×
(BD+BB)
kq2 (BC+BA)
q1rB m 12r ....(2)
2 2a
r
kq2 mv 2
(A) .... (1)
2 r
r
F/2
kq2 mv12 F+ F/2
Now qv1B ....(2) 3F/2 F/2
r2 r
axis = MB
= NiAB
(i) | B A || BB || B C ' || BD | B
time = 20 min
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
202 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
17. (A)
0i
BAB = [sin + sin ]
4 x ( a / 2 )2
2
0i 2(a / 2)
• = .
2 2 2 2
4 x ( a / 2) a 2 a
x
2 2
B A
i
0i
=
B ( 4 x 2 a 2 )( 2a 2 4 x 2 )
BA
x 2 (a / 2)2
only vertical component remain and add.
x
So Bresultant = BAB vertical = 4BAB sin
i
AB 4 0ia a/2
a/2
=
( 4 x 2 a 2 )( 2a 2 x 2 4) x 2 (a / 2 ) 2
0ia 2
=
( 4 x a )(2a 2 4 x 2 )1/ 2
2 2
4 0 ia 2 2 2 0i
(B) x = 0, B =
2 2 1/ 2 a
a
2 a ( 2a )
x2
2
4 0ia 2 0ia2
B= B=
2
( 4 x )( 2x ) 2 x3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 203
Q 150 15 x 103 (R 5)
o I2 4 x 107 x 4 or 104 = R +5
BP
2R 2 x 0.02 or R = 10000 - 5 = 9995
5 2
4 x 10 Wb / m
oI1 6. B
BQ
2R
Let E and B be along X-axis. When a -charged
4 x 10 7 x 3 particle is released from rest, it will experience
2 x 0.02 an electric force along the direction of electric
field or opposite to the direction of electric field
3 x 105 Wb / m2
depending on the nature of charge. Due to this
B B2P B2Q (4 x 105 )2 (3 x 10 5 )2 force, it acquires some velocity along X-axis.
Due to this motion of charge, magnetic force
5 x 105 Wb / m2 cannot have non-zero value because angle
between v and B would be either 00 or 1800.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
204 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Y
So, only electric force For r >a
is acting on particle
and hence, it will move oI
B B x 2r oI B
X 2r
along a straight line. E
r
Z
7. B I
At r = 2a, B2 o
Ferromagnetic substances have strong 4a
tendency to get magnetised (induced
magnetic moment) in the same direction as B1
that of applied magnetic field, so magnet B 1 a
2
attracts N1 strongly. Paramagnetic substances
get weakly magnetised (magnetic moment
induced is small) in the same direction as 12. B
that of applied magnetic field, so magnet
the magnetic field inductions at a point P, at
attracts N2 weakly. Diamagnetic substances
also get weakly magnetised when placed in a distance d from O in a direction
an external magnetic field but in opposite perpendicular to the plane of the wires due
direction and hence, N3 is weakly repelled by to currents through AOB and COD are
magnet. perpendicular to each other, is
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 205
x3dx 1
19. D
0
4
R 4
Consider the wire to be made up of large
number of thin wires of infinite length.
Consider such wire of thickness dl subtending
an angle d at centre.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
206 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
22. A
3 103 0.1
Taking an elemental ring of I= =3A
100
radius r and thickness dr,
R or
we obtain magnetic field at 25. A
the centre of the ring dr For equilibrium = 0
= MB sin n̂
Q
.2rdr If, sin = 0; = 0
o o dq o R 2
dB di . .
2r 2r T 2r 2 If angle between M and B is zero, then stable
equilibrium
o Q If angle between M and B is , then unstable
dr
2R 2 equilibrium
So, Net magnetic field at the centre of disk,
26. C
R o Q R o Q
B dB 2R dr
0
2
0 2R Cross-sectional view
i2
(Both solenoids are i1
1
i.e., B taken to be ideal in
R
nature.)
23. B Both wires will attract each other, but net
For charged particle in magnetic field, radius force on each wire will be zero.
Concept:
mv 2Km
r
qB qB Two current carrying
elements attract each
1 2 m2v2
[as mv = p K = mv p2 / 2m other if direction
2 2m
of current is same.
p = 2Km ] F.B.D
m F1 0
r
q
F2 0
or md = 2mp and qd = qp :
m = 4mp 27. D
and q = 2qp
mp 2mp 4mp
r p ; rd : r = : : L L
qp qp 2qp
0i2
1: 2 :1 i x
d 2d
r = rp < r d
24. A
0i2
tan =
B 2d
Coercivity = 3 × 103 A/m .g.
0
.g. sin
B = 0 (3 × 103) = 0 nI i2 = . cos (2) d [d = 2L sin]
0
gL
100 i = 2 sin
= 0 I 0 cos
0.1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 207
28. C
104
= 15 + R
5
I I 2 × 103 = 15 + R
2R = 4a R = 1985
a 2 a 32. D
= =
R 4 R 2 0 5
B1 =
2r
m = NI r2
a m = Ir2
R 2m = I r'2
a
0I
B2 =
2 2r
0i i
BA= B = 0 2 2
2R B a
1 r2
= 2
2 r'
BA 0i a
= × r' = 2r
BB 2R 2 20i
B1 2
a 2 B2 = 1
= = =
4 2R 4 2 2 8 2
33. C
mv = p
29. C p2
k=
For electromagnet & transformer hysteresis 2m
loss is less.
2mK m
r= r
qB q
30. B Masses Mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg
I M = 6.68 × 10–27 kg
T = 2 Me = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
MB
Chagres qe = –1.6 × 10–19 C
qp = +1.6 × 10–19 C
7.5 10 6
= 2 qe = 6.4 × 10–19 C
6.7 10 2 0.01
mp
75 rp =
= 2 qp
67 100
2 75 4mp 2 mp
= × × 10 (for 10 oscillation) r = =
10 67 2qp 2qp
75 rp = r > r e
= 2
67
75
6.28 × = 6.65
67
31. B
ig = 5mA, G = 15
V = (G + R) ig
10 = (15 + R) 5 × 10–3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
208 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
i = BNAQ ×
F B
BNAQ
or ...(i)
I
4. A P ; B P,Q,S ; C Q,S; D Q,R
1 1
Hence, I2 k2max
2 2 5. A
From x = a to x = 2a
BNA z
max Q F q( v B ) qv 0B 0 k̂
2I
so
from x = 2a to x = 3 a a 2a 3a x
2BiNA BNA
2. (a) k = BNA (b) k = (c) Q F qv 0B 0 k̂
2I
(a) = MB = ki
6. (A) Q, R; (B) P; (C) Q, R; (D) Q
MB (NiA)B or (A) Q, R; (B) P; (C) Q, R; (D) Q, S
k NBA
i i
(b) = k . = BiNA ×
(A) B=0 (B)
2BiNA
k (as q = /2)
(c) = BiNA
t t P
or dt BNA
0 0
i dt
(C)
×
(D)
I = BNAQ
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 209
7. A Q ; B R,S ; C S; D P, Q, R For r
E = 0 [due to symmetry]
8. C
V + < – V – V+ + V – < 0
= I+A1 – I1A2 I[A1 – A2] 0
9. A,C,D
In region II, the particle follows a circular B0
path of radius I+ = I– but radius of loop are different.
mv For s
r – + –
qB E=0 P Q
V+ + V – 0 m
Therefore, the particle can enter region III if
– + –
r > . B0 B+ B–
2r 2 mv 2m
T 12. A
v v qB qB
The particle will return to region I if the time As B TC By given graph B2 > B1 TC1 TC2
For P
Symmetrically charges placed so B
7.5T
E=0
V+ = V – V+ + V– = 0
Inet = 0 B = 0 and = 0 So B option is correct.
For q 14. C
2T sin d = i. 2R d
E1 E2
E3 = 2R
– + – + – +
T
3 2 1 1 2 3 R= T
2
E1 + E3 – E2 > 0 E 0 IB
T=
V + = – V – V+ + V – = 0 2
Inet = 0 B = 0, = 0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
210 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
M = iA = Ia2(1 + /2) k̂
17. A
If we take a small strip of dr at distance r
from centre, then number of turns in this 21. D
X
strip would be, X X
B.dl i
0 in
X
r
X
N
dN dr X X
b a 2 R 2 XR
B . 2r = 0 × J r – 4 ;
Magnetic field due to this element at the
centre of the coil will be
0 J 2 R 2
0 (dN)I NI dr B = 2r r – 4
0
dB =
2r (b0a) r
As r = R/2 ; there fore B = 0
r b 0NI b
B dB In
ra 2(b a) a 22. D
20cm S
18. C,D S N
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 211
2R
0i (x 0 2x1 )
R = 2x (x x )
1 0 1
Mv 2 MV
0I qVB = r=
= (outside) r qB
2r
Opp. direction :
25. C 0i 1 1
B2 =
2 x1 x0 x1
0ia 2 oi
cos
2a h 2
2 3/2
2 a2 h2
0i x0
=
x (x x )
2 1 0 1
0i
cos
2 a2 h2 r1 B2 x0 (x0 x1 )x1
Thus r = B = x (x x ) × (x 2x )
2 1 1 0 1 0 1
a 2
a 2
h2 3/2
a2 h2 r1 x0 3x1
r2 = (x 0 2x1 ) = (3x1 2x1 ) = 3
a 2 a2 4
a 2
h
2 1/ 2
a 2
h2 2
28. C
2 2 2
a = 0.4a + 0.4h
B
0.6a2 = 0.4h2 Coercivity = 3 × 103 A/m
0
3 2 B = 0 (3 × 103) = 0 nI
h2 = a
2
h = 1.2 a 100
= 0 I
0.1
3 103 0.1
I= =3A
100
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
212 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
0i
B= [sin 30° – sin 60°]
4H cos 30
L 30°
L = 2 (L + R)
60°
Net force on wire will be F = i (L B) 60° 60° 90°
90°
a
if L B , then F =i| L | | B | = 2i (L + R) B
H c 30° 30°
os
30
if L || B , then F = 0 °
0i 12 1 3 0i
30. A,D B=
4 a 2
2 B = 4a 6 1 3
E V
qE = q Vd B Vd = =
B wB
34. A,B,D
I = neA Vd
Now, I1 = I2 A1 v d1 = A2 vd2 Z
l
V1 V2 C 0,0, 3R
w 1 d 2 w B = w 2 d 2 w B d 1 V1 = d 2 V2
1 2
Y
d1 = 2d2 V2 = 2V1
d 1 = d 2 V1 = V 2
w2 w1
31. A,C x=–R O x=R
I1 = I2
n1 e A1 v d1 = n2 eA2 vd2 –Y
n1 v d1 = n2 vd2
(A) At origin, B 0 due to two wires if I1 =
V1 V2
n1 w B = n2 w B
I2, hence Bnet at origin is equal to B due to
1 1 2 2 ring, which is non-zero.
If B1 = B2 then n1V1 = n2 V2 (B) If I1 > 0 and I2 < 0, B at origin due to
wires will be along + k̂ direction and B due
32. A,C
to ring is along – k̂ direction adn hence B
V = Ig (Rg + S)
can be zero at origin.
if Rg and S is large V
(C) If I1 < 0 and I2 > 0, B at origin due to
Rg wires is alogn – k̂ and also along – k̂ due to
I Ig 1
s
ring, hence B cannot be zero
if s Rg
Then I
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Magnetism | 213
50
r1 S= = 5.55
9
d2
d1 r2
(2) We have,
mv mv
r1 = qB , r2 = qB
1 2
B2
As B1 =
4
r1 = 4r2
m
Time in B1 qB = t1
1
m
Time in B2 qB = t2
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
214 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
B = 10-1 T = 0.1 T.
N
Field lines through loop
S
2. A increases so induced lines are
in downward direction so S
= NBA
a < g.
= 500×5×10-3×2×10-3 N
= 50×102×10-6
= 5×10-3 Wb. 7. B
The loop is rotated in clockwise direction so
current flows in AC direction so the forces
3. C
on the poles are as shown and hence magnet
= B. (R0 + t)2 rotate clockwise.
d
E= = 2B (R0 + t)
dt
× B . B
S N
4. D
d
× F . F
12t 5
dt
at t = 0.25 sec.
8. C
12 10.25 5 2 The surface is conducting hence its
equipotential.
2 B
i 0.2A
R 10 A
2v
r 2r v
5. B P Q
d 0er2
E
dt
4R
.
vB ·l
the end Y of the rod become postively
charged.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 215
10. B
l l d
dl vector is same in both the cases. 1 = v0d B0 1 , 2 = v0d. B0 1
a a
11. D v0 B0d v0 B0 d2
2 – 1 =
There is no change in flux so induced emf is a a
zero.
16. C
12. A
C
Vy l2 Vx
F
E A B
l1
VB – VA = Vy l1 B , VB – VC = Vx l2 B
will attract towards ‘P’.
17. A
13. C
q = CV B
A C B
q = C × V0 Bl = constant A
L C B
14. B VA – V C = V B – VC
VA – VB = 0
X d
dx a 0i
B=
2x 18. C
a d 10cm
0i
d 2x
.b.dx dE
7cm
B x dx
d
10cm
0ib d a 2 10 x2
= n VA – VB = = 0.051
2 a 2 2 7cm
d 0bi d a
ln
dt 2 a 19. B
The direction of induced current is such that
it opposes the effect of change in magnetic
15. A field.
20. B
The direction of induced current is such that
it opposes the effect of change in magnetic
d field.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
216 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
21. C 26. B
= BA
2 M
di,
4
0 5 = 2 ×104 V. d AdB
dt 103 v B . e = CA (Straight line)
dt dt
Ein as r > R
22. B 4
change in current is 2A
L × N2 2
2
108 600 27. D
L ' 500 q = CV = CV Bl = constant
25 28. C
L ' 100 = 75 mH
36 inductance work on eddycurrent.
29. C
23. A
10
i = i0 sint Initially L is open imin = = 1A
10
finally L is short.
1000
B = m0ni = 4×10-7 (1) sin t 10
102 imax. = = 2A
5
= 4× 10-2 sint imax – imin = 2 – 1 = 1A
-2 -4
= NBA = 50×4×10 sint×10
30. A
= 2×10-4 sint
di
d e = –L
22 102 2 104 dt
dt
di
f = 50 Hz. = slope
dt
12
150º
0º
24. A tan 150º = –1/ 3
v2 2 tan 120º = 3
Heat = t dt
R R
four graph 1 emf. is greater.
d
= = (aT –2at)
dt 31. A
T
aT 2at
2
a2 T 3 1 R
Heat = dt , (Frequency)
0
R 3R RC L
32. A
25. C
2AB + iR – + –
Ldi/dt
q=
R R
E
Ldi
= E – iR (straight line with -ve slope)
dt
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 217
33. C 37. D
at t = 0 the circuit will be open
1 2 dE 1 di
E= Li .2.Li i= 0
2 dt 2 dt
Ldi
U = 0 But 0
di dt
= Li
dt P= 0
= 2 × 2 × 4 = 16 J/sec. So emf. induce in conductor.
38. C
34. A
A rapid flux change in L
L= , iL = N , iL = NBA
i 39. A
diB
NBA EA = m.
i= dt
L
4 i
=2×
10 10
35. B
i = 2 ampere
R 2L
R / L
i i0 e t i0e L R
40. A
i0 1
i0e2 0.136i0 13.6% C
e2 0 0
36. A 41. A
FE qE, FB qV B
43. A
V = fC
F
44. B
v 2B 2
F=
R
S c 3 108
W 3W 4W C = V, 1.5 102 m
v 2 1010
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
218 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
45º
vt
3. C 9. A
The circuit is a Wheat stone bridge. On vBa
solving Req. = 3 ×
ar
ar
vBa
v 2 .1 1mA
vBa ar
= 10–3 VB
4 ar
vBa
v = 2 cm /sec.
4vBa vB
i
4. B 4ra r
q
R
10. C
R
5. C
During t = 0 to t = t1 E = v B . , iind
B is linear function of time
ilB
d F i( B)
= = –ve (const.)
dt
mg
as v Eind i F
d
During t = t1 to t2 = 0 (B is constant)
dt
During t = t2 to t1 B is linear function of time 11. A
with –ve slope At any time
N
d = BA cos t
= – = +ve (const.)
dt
d W
E=– = BA sin t
dt
6. A
S
B is inside. i=
E
R
So induce current decrease its producing
effect
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 219
19. C
r l
v 0i Self inductance for a solenoid is given as
d r
2 x
dx
0N2 r 2
L=
v0i r l l
vA – vB = ln
2 r Where N is numbers of turns
100
N1 =
14. C 2r
d
E.dl
2
e= 100
dt 0 R 2
2r
L1 = =L
l
(Br2 ) dB
E.2R = d , E.2R = R2
dt dt 2 2
100 R
0
R dB L2 = 2r 2
E= × × l
2 dt × × R ××
×
F = qE × × L1
× ××
× ×
L2 = 1 L2 = L
e R dB
a= (leftwards) P
2 m dt
20. B
15. C Let a currect i flow in coil of radius R.
Bl2 0i 2
E= Magentic field at the center of coil = r
2 2R
1 0i
= leffective B (L2 + 2) or Mi = . r 2 , M = 0 r 2
2R 2R
2
16. D 21. D
inertia
/2 2BA
t= Ave.m.f
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
220 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
22. A
0
Let I = current in one loop. Then magnetic then, magnetic field B I
b
flux at the centre of the other co-axial loop
at a distance from the centre of the first Flux associated with unit length of tape is
loop is
0I
h
0 2I.a 2 b
loop is B ...(1)
4 (a 2 2 )3/ 2 Then, corresponding value of inductance is
0 22a 4 26. C
12
or . 2 2 3/ 2 LRes = L1 + L2 – 2M = 0.02H
I 4 2(a )
0a 4 27. B
x
2(a 2 2 )3/ 2 vBl = 1 × .1 × .1
= 10–2 volt
12 = M12 I v 10
–2
2
x x x 10
12 1 0 a 4 0 O O O
M12 = 2 3 1
I 2 3
3x + 2x + 6x – 6 × 10–2 = 0
a << l.
11x = 6 × 10–2
23. C 6 10 2
x=
11
NI
B r0
2r 6 10 2
10 2
Total flux associated with N turns and length i = 11
1
a+b
r 0 IN 2 dr
a is = .Ia
2 r 5 10 2 1
a = amp.
11 220
r0 N 2 a
= .aI log e 1+
2 b 28. D L
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 221
29. C 33. A
– + 5mH The work done in pulling out loop equal
I
A – + 15V – + B to heat generated in t = 2 sec in following
Ldi circuit.
VB – V A = + 15 + IR
dt
1 E
VB – VA = 15 Volt E = vb = ` i=
8 R
H = i2 RT = 3.125 × 10–3 J
30. B
V Rt /L 34. A
e
R
2V M L 1L 2
For M maximum
V
O
2V(V/R) R V
M= L 1L 2
O
R 3V 3V 35. B
t =0 t= L
8
Charging = 1 =
2R
L
discharging = 2 =
2V 2V 3R
15V
36. C
+ – + – 4V
+ –
A –+ I B Ldi q +
4–2– 0, 2V
di dt c –
VA – VB = IR – 15 + L + Ldi/dt q/C
dt – + –
q
VA – VB = – 15 2–4– = 0
c
VB – VA = 15 q = 6 C
31. A
1
2 37. A
L
2 R radio wave, x-ray, visible ray
32. B
P = vi 38. B
400
t E=E0 Cos (kz–t)
2t
vi0 1 e 200
vi0 1 e
v = /k
E = 140cos(Kz–6×108t)
P1 vi0 1 e e 1 e
2 2 2
E0 = 40 i
P2 vi0 i e
4
e 1
4
=6×108 ;
2
e
2
1 e2
2
e2
e 1 e 1 e 1
2
6 108
K 2m1
v 3 108
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
222 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
i1 i2
S N
P Q
dB
N N S Attraction
E= A
S dt
(D) I1 0 , I2 0 1 0.5
x
and in opposite direction
1 1
1
N S N
1volt 0.5volt
o
1 0.5
2. A,C,D
Both are individual loop
x 1 x 0 x 0 .5 1
0 x
× × × × × 3 1 2 22
× × × × ×
× × × × × 5. A,B
× × × × ×
×
B
6. A,B,C,D
& B are parallel.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 223
7. B,D 9. A,D
C L VL = 0 imax. VR max
R R
10. A,C,D
E E Ldi
Power = i L1i1 = L2i2
dt
at t = 0 C acts as an open ckt
V2 1 W
Q = CE 2= 4
V1 4 W1
at t = 0 L acts as short circuit.
E i1 1
i=
R i2 4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
224 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
d
4t
dt ×B
v
10
4t dt = 200 rad/sec
0
= vB × 2R = vBd
d / 2 r
M1L2I2T 2 r
L
dvB
2. RCV M1L2I2T 3 I2T4M1L2 M1L2I1T 3
= I-1 d 2 vB
dvB = i i =
2
r dB e E. er Frequired = idB + idB
3 E.F. = a= a k
2 dt m 2m
directed along tangent to the circle of radius 2 ( 2vB 2 ) d
Frequired =
r whose center lies on the axis of cylinder.
4. 5.0 V
= B A = B. r mgR
9. Vterminal = ;
B 2l 2
d dr
= B. . 2r = 5.0v (a) ilB = T = mg ilB = mg
dt dt
VB2l2 mgR
mg v 2 2
R Bl
1
5. A
3
g
1 B r 2 B r 2 1 10.
i i= = Amp. 2
2 R 2R 3
(b) mg-T = ma
4 Bv v 2 B2
tan tan1 4 mg = i B =
3 3 10 R
Bv = 4 × 10–4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 225
0 himN b EL
12. ln dx 16.
2 a
x eR 2
b b Rt q Rt
0iN
i = i0 1 e
L
T = d = 2x .dx. h dq i0 1 e L . dt
a a
0 0
q = EL/eR2
N0 i h b N 0 h b
T = n = (im sint)n
2 a 2 a 17. kMT2/R
d N 0 h b di1
= (im sint)n E2 = M
dt 2 a dt
E2 = M. 2 Kt
0 ab M.2Kt
13. = ILln i2 =
2 a R
2x
ab
18. 42 + 20t volt
i .dx i
d = 0 di
2 x E-iR - L 0
a dt
dx E = (3+5t) 4 + 6 (5) = 42 + 20t
0 i a b a
= n
2 a x
0a b
19. M ln 1
2 c
14. 2N
Bvl c b
vB 0i1
i=
4 d c
2x
.a dx
F=iB
c b
b
0i1a dx
vB22 2 22 12
F= = F=2N = 2 x i1 c B
4 4 c
a
0i1a c b
2 = ln x
e 2 c
15.
e2 – 1
0i1a b
R = ln 1
t 2 c
i = i0 1 e
L
5H
at t = 1 0i1a b
10 = Mi1 = ln 1
15V 2 c
15 3
i0 = imax. =
10 2 0a b
M= ln 1
2 c
1 i1 e2 1
i1 = i0 1 2 i0
e2
e
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
226 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
25 103 5 l 20
M= = mH R . (where 0 = density of wire)
15 3 V
5 l02
2 = Mi1 = × 3.6 × 10–3 .
3 m / 0
2 = 6 mwb
Rm
l02 ...(1)
21. 0.10 km 0
Magnetic induction at centre of solenoid is
0 NI 0 l02
L ...(2)
B= 4 .l
l0
l0 is length of coil and l is length of solenoid
Then flux linked with whole solenoid is
0 N 2 r 2 I 0 Rm 0 mR
L
= NBA = ...(1) 4 l 0 4 l0
l0
Also = LI ...(2)
0 N 2 r 2 r0
L 23. In
lo 2
Let a and b be the inner and outer radii of
2 2 2 2 2
N .4 .r N .4 .r b
or L 0 0. cylinder so that
4lo 4l o a
Using Ampere’s circuital law
(N.2r) 2 B . 2r = 0rI
0 .
4l o
0 r I
Now N. 2r = l = length of wire used in so- B
2r
lenoid
then, flux linked per unit length is given by
.l2
L= 0 r b
0 r I 0 r I b
4l0 .1 dr log
r a 2 r 2 a
4 l0 L As = LI
then l
0 coefficient of self induction is given
by
then l = 0.10 km.
r 0 b
L log r 0 log
2 a 2
0 mR
22.
4 0
The resistance of the windings is
l0
R = . , is specific resistance.
A
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 227
B 0 av dB
1. i = in anticlockwise direction, = –ve
e
R dt
v = velocity at time t so net = 20 + 1.74 = 21.74 volts
B0l
v. .a
a 5. anticlockwise
d
= 2BV2t
B (l a)
v. 0 .a dt
a
(i) = 0.35 × (5.2)2 × 32 vt
2. 2 2
Fnett = B a V/R
0
= 85.2 weber 45°
(b) iaB1 - iaB2 45° vt
d
2
vBo a Bo (l a) vBo a Bol B a v2 2 2 (ii) = = 2BV2t
. . 0 dt
R a R a R
= 2 × 0.35 × (5.2)2 × 3 = 56
(iii) t so linearly increase with time
B 20 a2 t
mgR mR
3. V = B 2 a2 1 – e
0 I(R 2x) 2I2 m(R 2x)
7. , + BId
Bd B 2 d2
mdv B2a2v
F= = mg – 0 BVd
dt R
= BVd i= = constant.
R 2x
dv dt
B20a2v m
mg F
R
R idB
By integration V
v t x
dv 1
dt
v0 B20a2v m 0 F – i dB = ma .......(2)
mg
R eq. (1) BdV = i (2x + R)
B2a2v x t
mg 2 2 dx
n R tB0a Bd = i dt
( 2 x R )
mg mR 0 0
Bd 2 x R
n =it ..........(3)
4. 21.74 V 2 R
1
(i) = B. [Area of square]
2 R 2i t
1.74 V x=
2
e Bd 1 .........(4)
1
= (0.042 – 0.87 t) 4
2
= 2(0.042 – 0.87 × 2) 2it
20 V dx R 2i Bd
d v e .........(5)
= – 2 × 0.87 = – 1.74 volt dt 2 Bd
dt
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
228 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
2it
dv R i 2i Bd 0
a e 11. In
dt Bd Bd
a = radius of each wire
2Ri 2
2 it d = distance between wires
a 2 2 e Bd ........(6) For r > a,
B d
0I
2mRi2 2x B = 2B’
F = i Bd + 1 r
B2d2 R
Flux linked with unit length of double
line is
Ri 2x
from (5) and (4) V= 1
Bd R d a
0I I d
dr 0 In 1
a r r a
1 2 d
8. (a) E = Br But (given)
2
a
0I
In (-l)
Br 2 |1 – e–Rt /L |
9. (i) I = , (ii)
2R
0I
In ( >> l)
mgr B 2r 4
= cost + (1 – e–Rt/L)
2 4R = L I.
Inductance per unit length of double line is
10. 67/32 A 0
In
100
i1 = [1 – e–10 t]
10
at t = 0.1 n 2 sec 0 r Nh b
12. In
i1 = 10[1 – e–n 2] = 5 2 a
Now S2 opened
0 I
100
B
and i2 = [1 – e–(40 + 10) t] 2 r
40 10
then, flux ()
now let i2 = 5 for time t then
b
i2 = 2[1 – e–50 t] = 5 ...........(1) 0 r IN hdr 0 r NI h b
In
now after time 0.2 n 2 sec 2 a r 2 a
or for i2 (t + 0.1 n 2) sec Also, = MI
i2’ = 2[1 – e –50(t + 0.1 n 2)
] This gives the required mutual inductance
= 2[(1 – e–50 t)2–5 + 1 – 2–5] 0 r N h b
M In
67 2 a
= 5.2–5 + 2(1 – 2–5) from (1) i2’ = amp..
32
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 229
2. A = 9.09 × 10–11
B1n2i2
6.25 10 100 i
12
3 11. (D)
B2
n1i1 200(i)
E
1.05 10 2 / m2 =c
B
3. B
E = B.c = 20 × 10–9 × 3 × 108 = 6 v/m
d
e 20t 50 10volt
dt
12. D
4. D
4
Emf NAB w= 10 3 3 10 e 0.2x dx
max
= 4. 5 × 10–2 (1 – e–0.4)
5. D
w
0N1N2 A P= = 2.97
M 2.4 104 H T
13. A
6. B
In an EM wave
Induced emf
e = BH/v B2
1/2 0 E2 =
20
= 0.30 × 10–4 × 20 × 50 = 3 mV
Both are equal.
7. D
14. D
Due to oscillation of coil magnetic field
changes in aluminium and eddy currents are E = hf E f
made which damps coil.
8. B R v
D,B,A,C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
230 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
d
IR =
dt
d = IRdt
= 20t 10 100 dt
= 2000t 1000dt
1/2
2
2000 t
= 2
1000 t
0
1 1
= –1000 × + 1000 ×
4 2
= – 250 + 500
= 250
16. D
2v
=K
C
2K K' = 2K
No change in for
w
K' =
C
C
Velocity in medium =
2
1
and C = 0 0
1 1
= r er
2
Hence r = 4
r1 1
=
r2 4
(mr No change as it is a non-magnetic
material)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 231
5. A 0
= (0.1)2. I0 sin(300t) {300}
No friction No power consuption
6. D
Magnetic moment M = i A = A
Apply Lenz low R
8. A = 6 0 I0 sin (300 t)
Recall EMI
13. A,C
As current inside = 0
9. APQST ; BQ ; CS ; DS
so Magnetic flux = 0 in all cases.
(P) (A) : elec. energy stored.
(Q) (AB) energy supplied, increasing
14. 7
internal energy
At the position of square loop
(R) (none) energy reduces, heat flows out,
internal energy drops 0iR 2 0i
(S) (ACD) Mass to energy coversion B= =
2(R 2R 2 )3/2
2
16R
(T) (A) Current flows leading to heat
generation 0i 1
= BA cos = 2a2
APQST ; BQ ; CS ; DS 16R 2
10. B,D 0 ia 2
= ,
qflow –1
, h v2 (q / m) (1 / m). 8 2R
Since hA > hB , mA A < mB B.
0 a2 0 a2
M= = = 7 /2
i 8 2R 2 R
11. D
B within region should be outward P =7
iab from a to b & icd from d to c with both
equal
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
232 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
15. B v x B2l2
d
v0
dv 0 Rm
dx
E.d l dt B.dA
B2l2
v v0 x
mR
d
E (2R) = (B) (R2)
dt
18. B,C
dB i = 10 A/sec–1 I I
E (2R) = R2 10cm
dt (2xdx)
R dB BR 0 i I
E= = d1 = (2xdx)
2 dt 2 2 x
I
0.1
16. BC 0
BR
d1 =
i dx x
E= 0 dx
2 2x
QBR 0i
F = QE = d1= (0.1)
2
FR QBR R 0 0.1 di
= = 2 MR 2 = 0
I e1 =
dt
QB
= 2 1
2M
QB M = di1 = di2
= T = (T) dt dt
2M
Given If we consider
M = L. Thus M = L
di1 di
= (I) () = 2
dt dt
=
MR 2 QB T
0
2M 2 =
R 2QBT
Thus M= Net force between the loop and the wire
2
Put T = 1 is repulsive
R 2 QB Iin
M=±
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Electromagnetic Induction | 233
19. 8 2P
B
3qR
1mH
mv 3R r
2mH qB 2
r
Bq 2
P 3R d
5V 2P
B
3qR
Min. current is at t = 0
5
imin = A d 3R / 2 qB
12 sin = sin
r mv
Max. current is at t
3R 8 P 24 12
1 q =
2P 13 qR 26 13
R eq = 3 + 4 + 12
R
r (1–Cos ) = R 1 – Cos =
r
RqB qR 8 P
1 – Cos = 1 – Cos =
P P 13 QR
8 8
1 – Cos = Cos = 1
13 13
3
req = 5
2 Cos = =
13
10 imax 10 12
imax = A i = × =8
3 min 3 5 22. B,C,D
1 di
20. B,C V – i R – L1 dt = 0
induced current is both loops in opposite directions;
2 di
enet = e2 – e1 Also, V – i R – L2 dt = 0
2 = 2BA cost 1
1 = BA cost 1 di
2 di
from above L1 dt = L2 dt
d2 2
e2 = – = 2BA sint i1 i2
dt
e1 = BA sint
L1
0
di1 = L
2 di
0
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
234 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
23. C
R R
t t
V R e L R e 2L
E0
Electron (II) v B ŷ (III) E E0x̂ (S) B B0ẑ R L 2L =0
0
Electric force on electron is along +x-axis FE = –e R
R
t 1 2L t
(E0 x̂) = eE0x̂ & magnetic force on electron, L = e
e 2
FM = –e (v B)
R
t
1
E0 e 2L =
2
= – e B B0 (ŷ ẑ) = – eE0x̂
0
R
t = n 2
24. A 2L
0 E
(IV) Proton v 2 B x̂ (i) E E0ẑ (S) B B0ẑ 2L
0 or t = n 2
R
FE eE eE0ẑ This is the time when i is maximum
2E R 2L R 2L
V L R n2 n2
0
& FM = e(v B) = e B B0 (x̂ ẑ)
e 2L R
0 imax = R e
Initial magnetic force = –2eE0 ĵ
V 1 1 1 V
25. A |imax| = 4 2 =
R 4 R
Electric force along -y aixs
& magnetic force is zero.
Initial value = 0. So particle will move along -y-
axis
26. B,D
R L R 2L
i1 i2
V V
R R
t V t
V 2L L
i = (i2 – i1) = R 1 e 1 e
– R
R R
V L t t
e e 2L
R
d(i)
For (i)max = 0
dt
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 235
ALTERNATING CURRENT
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
1. D i same
Given T = 1s = 10-6 s P1 > P2 > P3
40 watt
1 1
f 106 Hz
T 106
6. B
Avg. value of current in one complete cycle
2. B is zero.
Given i = 4 sin (100 t + 30°)
7. A
at t = 0 ;
At resonance condition XL = XC then
i 4 sin 30 2A
ZR
100t 100 103
i 100m.Amp
3 1
1 8. A
t sec.
300 Given potential difference between the ends
of the resistance wire = VR
9. C
4. B
Reactance is zero.
Theory only capacitor
i.e. XL – XC = 0
or XL = XC
5. C
Theory
Given P1 = 40 w, P2 = 60 w, P3 = 100 w
1 10. C
R
P In resonance condition
1
1 1
R1 0.25 LC
P1 40
when L 25% and C 20% then
1
R2 0.17
60 1 1
new
125 80 5 4
1 L C L C
R3 0.01 100 100 4 5
100
R3 R2 R1 1
new new
LC
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
236 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
12. A 1 1
XC 2000
From Given data C 5
2 50 106
Vapplied = 10 V
VC = 8 V XL = XC then Z = R
VR = ?
82 + x2 = 102 18. A
x = 6 volt
R R
4 % increase 0 . 5 0 . 866 100 = 73.2 %
= tan–1 R
3
0.866
13. C
19. A
V0
Vrms 220 Given R = 0 then
2
P= I 2R = 0
V0 220 2 311 volt
20. D
14. C
XL L 1000 V
4
XL new 2 2L 4 1000 4000
3 I
53º
15. D
Z = 5
XL L 100 0.1 10
i = 2 sin (t – 53º)
100 VL = 8 sin (t – 53º + 90º)
i sin 100t 10 cos 100t A
10 2 = 8 sin (t + 37º) = 8 sin ( + 37º)
3
= –8 sin 37º = –8 ×
16. B 5
= –4.8 volts
X L L = 2f × L
i.e. potential lacks behind.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 237
10 sin 314 t dt
0
Z= R2 xL xC
2
Iavg T
2 When tuned to resonance then
0
dt XL = XC
z=R
2i0
0.637i0 0.637 10 = 6.37 A
9. C
4. D In L–C oscillation
q Ldi
=
I2 c dt
Ims I20 1
2 charge is decreasing i = – dq/dt
i
2
di d q
36 = 2
9 9 18 27 3 3 dt dt
2 Q0 C L
d2q
q/c = –L 2
5. A dt S i
1
60
3 q = Q0 sin LC t 2
current leads the emf by 60°.
between q & i is –
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
238 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
10. A
3
Given V = 100 V D.C., I = 1 A, cos = 0.6 = 60º R
5
When 100 volt D.C. apply = 53º XC
V 100 cos = 0.5
i= = =1
R coil R coil = 60º
XC = XL
Rcoil = 100
when 100 V A.C. of 50 Hz then i = ½ A XL XC
tan 53º = R & tan 60º = R
1 2
100
Z=
1
2 4 XL X4
=R & 3 = R
3 1 4
2 2 2
Z = 200 = R coil L
R1 3 3
2002 = 1002 + 42 × 502 × L2
R2 4
On solving we get
3
L= H 13. A
V = 5 cos t = 5 sin (t +/2)
i = 2 sin t
11. C
= /2
E 141 .4 P = Vrms × Irms cos
Z= = = 20 2
i 5
5 2
X XC = × cos /2 = 0
tan = L 2 2
R
By E and I
14. D
= 2
Given
XL = XC
V0 = 283 V R=3
1 L = 25 × 10 –3
H C = 400 × 10–6 F
then 2 =
LC
For maximum power XL = XC
= 5000
1 1
and L = 0.01 C = 2 =
L LC
C = 4F
R = 20 2 1
LC
12. D
1
f
2 2 LC
1 1
50.3
XL 2 3.14 25 10 3 400 106
53º
R1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 239
15. C
4A
1
cos =
2
RI
1 XL–XC
L – = 10 45º
c
10 12V
1
100 0.1 = 10
100 c
2
Vrms
2f = 100 C = 500 F Power = 2 = 17.28 w
1
R 2 L
C
16. D
L
tan 60º = L = 0.6 H 18. C
R
Paverage = irms Vrms . cos
1
tan 60º = C = 1.9 × 10–5 F R
RC irms Vrms ×
z
200 = irms2 . R
so I =
2 = 22 × 5 = 20
2 1
(100) 300 0.6
5
3001.9 10
19. AD
I = 2A Both are correct
Power dissipated = 4 × 100 = 400 Watt A - step up transformer increase input
voltage.
Vrms
Irms =
R I2 ( L )2
12
2.4 = L = 0.08H
9 (50L )2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
240 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
V0 200
V0 = 200 V, Vrms = 100 2 4. A,B,C
2 2
106
2 (500)2
2 377
2. B,C,D
vrms = 100 V. 282 282 500
= = 10 W
Peak value of voltage = 100 2V 2 1410 1410
100 2 5. A,D
Peak value of current = 2 2A
50
Theory of Transformer.
2 2
Irms = 2A
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 241
5 i0
1. 4. i=
6 2
i0
= i0 e–t/ t = n2 ....(i)
E = E0 cos (t + ) can be written as 2
3
i = i0 e–t/
E E0 sin t q t
2 3 t /
0
dq = i e
0
0 .dt
5
E0 sin t
6 q i0 e t / 1
By equestion (i)
5
Phase diff. =
6 ln2
q i0 e 1
2. I 20 0.5 I 12 i0L
2R
T
2
I .dt
0 2 2
5. 9.2 F
= T
= I0 0.5I1
dt
0
100V
60º
1 2 2 1/2 x
3. (i i )
2 1 2
T
(200)2 = (100)2 + x2
1 2
Irms I cos2 t I22 sin2 t 2I1I2 sin t cos tdt
T 1 x = 3 100
0
–
R
1 I12 I2
T 2 T 60º
T 2 2
1
C
1
I 2
1 I22 2
1
tan 60º = = 3
cR
– 9.2 F
c~
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
242 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
6. 20 V R2 = Z2cos2 = 23 (0.707)
= 16.26
v v2L vR2
2 2
XC = z2 R 2
144 256
2 2
= (23) (16.26) = 16.26
400
= 20v when resistance are connected in series
R = R1 + R2 = 39.26
7. 2H XL – XC = 14.41
Given C = 5 F, R = 10 and f = 50Hz 2 2
Z = R (xL xC ) = 41.82
cos = 1
R V 230
then cos = = 1 (a) i = = = 5.5A
Z Z 41.82
1 R 39.26
L = cos = = = 0.939
z 41.92
c
since
1 1 20 XL > XC ,
L= 2 =
C 2 50 2 8 10 6 2 H This power is lagging
V2 1
115 P R
Z1 = = 38.33 R P
3
R1 R1 P2 300 3
cos 1 = Z R 2 P1 500 5
1
R1 = Z1 cos1
= (38.33) (0.6) = 23
2 2
XL = z1 R1 = 30.67
V2
Z2
I2
115
Z2 = = 23
5
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 243
– (3 + 5t) R – L5 = 0 E = 42 + 20t
1/2
T
= 1 (a b sin t)2 dt
T
0
P Q
1uf 4.9mH 68
1/2
1 T
Ieff = (a2 2ab sin t b2 sin2 t)dt
T 0 5.
T T 10V
1 1 2 1
but as
T
0
sin t 0,
T
0
sin t dt,
2
for max. current flow
1/ 2
2 b2 1
Ieff = a 2 L – =0
C
Resonance frequency
2
105
(68)2 4.9 103
7
3. c1+c2 L
= 97.6
2 2
1 2 7
ZP = R2 ( 32 ) 5
imax =
Vmax C 10 10 6
1
L ( C C ) = 77
1 2
iq and q c
C1
so ic1 = C C . imax
1 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
244 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 245
1 25 10. D
VL I L 200 250V
10 2 The given circuit is under resonance as
XL = XC Hence, Power dissipated in the circuit
7. B is
For given circuit current is lagging the voltage
V2
P 242W
by , so circuit is purely inductive and there R
2
X R
is no power consumption in the circuit. The tan 30 L XL
work done by battery is stored as magnetic R 3
energy in the inductor. X R
tan 30 C XC
P = Vrms Irms cos R 3
XL XC 0
= P=0
2
P = Vrms Irms cos
8. D
V2 220 220
Rise of current in L-R circuit is given by P= = 242W
2R 2 200
I = I0 (1-e-t/)
E 5 10H 11. B
Where Io 1A
R 5 At t = 0, inductor behaves like an infinite
resistance
L 10 5V
Now, 2s V
R 5 So at t = 0, i R
2
After 2s, ie, at t = 2s
and at t = , inductor behaves like a
Rise of current I = I0 (1-e-1)A. conducting wire
R 5
E t 5 2
i
V
V(R1 R 2 )
i 1 e L 1 e 10 1 e1
R 5 R eq R1R 2
9. D 12. A
Given L = 400 mH and R1 = 4 , R2 = 2, V
V = 12 V
V 12
I1 6A
R1 2 S1
A R
R1 L
dI2
EL R 2 I2 C
dt
S2
I2 = Io (1-e-t/tc) L
R2
S
E 12
t
Io 6A
q = CV 1 e
RC
R2 2
At t = 2RC
L 400 x 10 3
tC 0 .2 , q = CV [1 – e–2]
R 2
I2 6(1 e5t )
Potential drop across
L = E - R2L2 = 12-2x 6(1-e-5t) = 12 e-5t
2
t
VL VeR / Lt 12 e 400103 12 e5 t V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
246 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
13. A 16. C
When BC are joined only
L & R are in circuit – +
Applying KVL, R
VR + VL = 0 + 210 80V
L
VR = –VL –
VR
V =–1 220
L
d2q dq q
I xL = 210 XL = 2fL = 210
L R C
dt2 dt C 210
L= = 0.065 H
comparing with equation of damped oscillation 10 100
d2y dy
d ky
dt2 dt 17. B
bt
The eqution of amplitude is y Ae 0L
R R
where b
2m 2L 1
Rt Resonant Frequency 0 =
LC
qmax q0e 2L
Rt 0L
q2max q20e
L So quality factor is given by =
R
R
time constant = 18. C
L
Pamg = Vrms. Irms . cos
since L1 > L2
1 < 2 100 20
= . .cos 45
Hence correct graph is 3. 2 2
1000
= Watt
Alternative solution 2
The value of Qmax reduces because of energy Wattless current = Iv sin45°
dissipation in resistor. As the value of inductor e
increases the time taken for capacity to /4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 247
2. D
8. A,C
at anytime t>0 instantaneous current in the
Given = 100 rad/sec.
L
circut may V (R1 = 100 , C = 100 F)
C
R2 = 50 , L = 0.5 H
3. C
XL = L = 50
d2Q I1
The charge on capacitor is Q LC 100 2
dt2 1
XC = = 100
c
4. B 50 2
I2
1 V 20
Z R2 I1
R 100 2
C2
2
20V
1
XC Z R 2 X C2
C 9. B
IR B
IR > IR A P = vi
1 = 30 %
1.25 R2 = R2 +
(500 C)2
10. A
1
0.25 R2 = 2 Step - up
(500 C)
v 10
4000 1
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
248 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
40000 1mH
Step Down : 200
200
2mH
200 : 1
11. A,C
5V
Min. current is at t = 0
5
imin = A
12
Max. current is at t
I = I0 cos t
1
I0 1 1 = + +
V0 = = = R eq 3 4 12
c 50 .0 20 10 6 10 10 3
1
= = 100
10 2
7 3
= 2 × 10–3 sin × req =
6 2
7
= 2 × 10–3 sin 10
6 imax = A
3
4
= 2 × 10–3 sin 2 6 imax 10 12
imin = 3 × 5 = 8
2
2 103
3 13. C,D
1
2 103 cos 0 106
2 6 LC
A & B incorrect
3 C & D correct – Theoretical
2 10 sin 6
14. A,D
3 1
2 10 103 2
2 vxy = vy – vx = v0 sin t 3 sin t = v0
Magnitude of charge at
7
t 2 cos t sin
6 3 3
Hence A & C are correct.
3
3 v0 cos (t + /3) vxy, RMS
= v0
2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Alternating Current | 249
vyz = vz – vy
4 2
= v0 sin t sin t = v0
3 3
15. 2.00
m = 10–3 kg, q = 1 C t = 0
E = E0 sin t
dv E
= q 0 sin t
dt m
v /
qE0
dv
a
=
0
m sin t dt
qE0
or v = [–cos t]0/
m
qE0
or v = [(–cos) – (–cos)]
m
11
v= × 2 = 2 m/s
10 3103
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
250 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Modern Physics-I
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
1. C
Pt λ Eλ
No. of Photon= =
hc hc
hf = +ev s
if E is constant no. of photon is
2. A
7. B
hf =1.7+10.4=12.1eV =energy
-3
in H-atom 10
No.of Photons=
12400 -19
×1.6×10
5000
x=3
16
=0.25×10
12.09 ev -6
- 0.16×10 +12
n=1 No.of e reaching= =10
-19
1.6×10
12
10
%= ×100=0.04%
3. A 16
0.25×10
A Photon can interact with only a single
electron.
8. C
As distance ses.
9. C
I ses. If v1, v2, v3 are in A.P. then
i hc
= +eV
λ 1 ....(1)
P 1
I
4 r2
hc
= +eV ....(2)
λ 2
2
5. B
Ephoton = 6 ev hc
Max KE = 4ev =+eV ....(3)
λ 3
3
= Ephoton - Kmax
= 6 - 4 = 2v After solving (1), (2) and (3) we get
then stopping Potential is 4v. 21 3
2 which are in H.P.
1 3
6. C
12400 eV)
(
E=
(
λ in Å)
IAt λ
No. of Photon=
hc
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 251
=3eV hc
0
K.E.max =3eV in Second case
1 4.5 2
11. C 2.3 1
2
They have same K.E.
h
λ=
2m K.E. 16. B
W = h – eVs
mp > me and qp=qe
h = energy of incident photon
1
p<e as
m 12400
Here h eV 10eV
1240
12. A W = 10 – 8 = 2 eV
v = 150volt 12400
Å 6200Å
2eV
150
λ=
V
17. A
1Å
12375
1 Å 1000Å
E1(eV)
13. D
E1 = 12.375 eV
h 12
=10 h
λ
12375 12375
Similarly, (Å) eV 2000 6.1875eV
2
14. D
Now, E1 – W0 = eVs
and E2 – W0 = eVs
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
252 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
18. C 21. B
hc nh
E= – 0 J = mvr =
2
hc
2E = 0 n=3
'
1
K.E. = - T.E. = 13.6 ×
hc 9
Solving '
E hc = 1.51ev
19. B
22. C
1
mv12 hf1 – 0 1 1 hc
2
E Rcz 2 2 2
and n1 n2
1
mv22 hf2 – 0 C
Shortest
2
D
longest
Subtracting, we get
1
m(v12 – v22 ) h(f1 – f2 ) 23. C
2
2.18 1018
I.E.
2 2 2h n2
v1 – v2 (f1 – f2 )
m
2.18 1018
9
20. C
= 2.42 × 10-19 J
hc
E 0
24. A
hc n 1 3 n 1 3 1 10
2E 0
' 2
(n-2) (n+1) = 20
' E 0 ' n2 - 3n - 18 = 0
Dividing, we get 2E or <1 n=6
0
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 253
32. A
34. B
T.E.=P.E. + K.E.
The energy taken by hydrogen atom
Existed corresponds to its transition from n = 1 to
Gnd n = 3 state.
E (given to hydrogen atom)
E
1 8
So both P.E. & K.E. 13.6 1 13.6 12.1 eV
9 9
33. A
Here, energy loss during the collision is used 35. A
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
254 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
E 3R h 2E
p= = 2v1v2
c 4 m
Recoiling speed of hydrogen atom is given by 2 2
atom.
2 E
v1 v2 v2 4
3R h 7
3 1.1 10 6.63 10 34 m
= =
4m 4 1.67 1027 As v1 – v2 must be real, therefore
–1
= 3.3 ms E
v2 4 0
m
38. C
1
1 or mv2 2E
2
E = R hc 1
25
The minimum energy that can be absorbed
Momentum of photon emitted is by hydrogen atom in ground state to go into
excited state is 10.2. eV.
E 24
p = = R h Therefore,
c 25
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 255
45. B
1
mv2min 2 10.2 eV When ever the energy of photon is doubled
2
then work function increases must more than
= 20.4 eV
by 2 times.
40. B
46. C
1 1
E = 13.6 2 2 Energy of photon is given by mc2. Now, the
1 6
maximum energy of photon is equal to the
= 13.22 eV maximum energy of electrons = eV
E
p= eV
c Hence, mc2 = eV m =
c2
41. C 47. D
hc hc
E
E 1 2 1 1
Using R(z 1) 2 2
n n
p q 2 1
EP EQ
For K line; n1 = 2, n2 =1
EK EK
So Q
K 1875R 3
For metal A; = R (z1-1)2
P
K 4 4
z1 = 26
42. C
3
0.1 to 10Å (x-ray range) For metal B; 675 R = R (z2–1)2
4
z2 = 31
43. D Therefore, 4 elements lie between A and B.
When freqency is increased energy increases
i.e. penetrating power increases 48. A
1 3R
44. C (z 1)2
4
3 4 4
(z-1)= 3R
L 3 1.1 107 1.8 1010
1 2
K 200 5 78
= 26 z = 27
E1 + E3 = E2 3 33 3
hk+ hLhk
kkL
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
256 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
49. C 50. B
The cut-off wavelength when V = V1 = 10 k
13.6Z2
En eV V is
n2
hc
k 1 = eV = 1243.125 ×10-13m
En – eV 1
n2
The cut-off wavelength when V = V2 = 20kV
k k k is,
E1 – , E2 – , E4 –
1 4 16
hc
2 621.56 1013 m
k k eV2
Now, E2 – E1 – – –
4 1
The wavelength corresponding to K line is,
k 3k 1 3R
k– (z 1)2
4 4 4
From given information, (–2)=3(–1)
k k
E4 – E2 – – – Solving above equation, we get Z = 29
16 4
k k 3k
–
4 16 16
Clearly, E2 – E1 > E4 – E2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 257
1. D
2hc 2hc
K2 K2 ii
1 1
hc
= +K
λ Now eq. (1) - eq. (2)
4hc 4 4K 2K1 K2 0
= + ..............(1)
3λ 3 3
K2 2K1
4hc ' 4hc '
= + K = +K ......(2)
3λ 3λ K2 K2
K1 K1
equation (2)-equation (1) 2 2 2
' 4 4
K - K- + =0
3 3 5. C
' 4 4K eV1
K = K+ > V 0 f f0
3 3 3 f1 f0
eV1 f0
2. C = or f0 h
f0 f1
7. B
3. D
h hc 2
Eph
= 4ev or 2mEe =
2mEe Eph c2
K.E.max = E -
eV0 = (13.6-4) eV
1 2E
V0 = 9.6 V But Ee = mv2 or m = 2e
2 v
for zero photo current
Vanode must be > Vs 2E E2ph
Vanode = 10 V 2 2e Ee 2
v c
4. C 2 E2e v2
4E2e Eph
or or E2 4c2
hc 2hc v2 c2 ph
K1 2 2K1
1 1
Ee v
or
Eph 2c
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
258 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
8. C 12. D
Electric field may increase or decrease the
h
speed of electron
2mqV
h h
mV = constant As P mv
1837 V’ = 1×V
magnetic field will on change the speed of
V the particle.
or V’ = volt
1837
so 1 2 or 1 2
9. B
13. D
Since the stopping potential depends on the
For equilibrium, force exerted by the light
fequency and not on the intensity and the
beam should balance the weight of plate.
source is same, the stopping potential remains
unaffected. The saturation current depends Fphoton mg
on the intensity of incident light on the
cahtode of the photocell which in turn IA P
depends on the distance of the source from Fphoton , where power P = IA
c c
cathod. The intensity of light is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance P
10 103 10
between the light source and photocell. c
Intensity, I 1/r2 and saturation current I
(Intensity) P 3 107 W
1
Saturation current 14. C
r2
Energy of one photon E = hc/
2
(Saturation current)final r initial
If power of source is P, the number of photons
(Saturation current)initial r 2
final
incident on the metallic surface
P P
0.2 0.2
Saturation current 18 =2 mA E hc
0.6 0.6
Momentum of incident photons =h/l
Change in momentum due to reflection=2h/
10. C
Total momentum imparted to the surface per
Applying conservation of linear momentum :
second is
Initial momentum = Final momentum
0 = m1v1 – m2v2 m1v1 = m2v2 2h P 2P
hc c
1 h / m1v1
Now, 1
2 h / m2 v2 Force 2P 2P
Pressure = A
Area c cA
11. D
The wavelength of a particle of momentum 2 5 10 3
p is 3.33 105 N m–2
3 108 106
= 2.9 × 10–11 m.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 259
15. A
IInd excited state
hv = 1.89
h 1 Ist excited state
(A) so Ground state
mv m
h
(B) so doesn’t depends on m 1.89 5
P Z 0.185
10.2 27
h 1 hc hc
1.89 10.2
(C) so 1 2
2mE m
1 10.2
Now 5.39
h 1 2 1.89
(B) so
2mev m
h h P2 2
P
16. D p P2 1
1 1 hc P1 1.89 5
ΔE=Rcz 2 2 - 2 =
n1 n2 λ P2 10.2 27
1 2
z
λ
For z = 3 Li2 20. B
λ will be minimum
Z2 1
T .E. 13.6 3.4 13.6
n2 n2
17. C
13.6
n2 n2 4 n2
r 3.4
z
1 K.E. T .E. 3.4 P2 2m 3.4(ev)
f 2 & T n3
n
3
T1 n1 1 2 9.1 1031 3.4 1.6 1013
T2 n32 23
1: 8 P 1024
h 6.67 1034
6.6 1010 m
18. B p 10 24
Total no. of oribits are (n+1)
n n 1 21. A
No. of spectral lines =
2 In ultra violet region lyman series is present
23. C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
260 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
P2 h2
E 26. A
2m 2m2
Imagine the sphere to be made of thin circular
34 2
(6.62 10 ) rings of radius r, thickness ds = R dq and
2 4 1.67 1027 (0.1 1010 )2 subtending an angle of at the center.
Momentum per second of incident photons,
1
eV
1.6 1019 dP I
dt dA cos2
incident c
43.82 1068
2.05eV Since surface of mirror is considered to be
21.376 1068
ideal, i.e., reflection coefficient is unity,
photons suffer momentum change in normal
24. C direction only.
for largest wavelength of Balmer series
dP 2l
n=3 to n=2 dt dA cos2
photon c
So Electron will jump from ground state
to n=3 dP 2l 2
dFn c dA cos
Energy Required = 13.6 - 1.51 dt ball
= 12.1ev
This force may be resolved into horizontal
and vertical components. The vertical
25. D component dFn sin is cancelled because
Momentum corresponding to incident protons every element on the upper half has a
normal to the surface. symmetrically placed element in the lower
half. So, resultant force on the ball.
dP I
dt dA cos2 2l
c 3
incident F= dF n cos c dA cos
Since reflection coefficient is , so the dA = (2R sin ) R d
momentum of the reflected photons per
second normal to surface,
/2 I
F= 4 R 2 cos3 sin d
0 c
dP I
dt dA cos2 4R 2I / 2 R 2I
c cos3 sin d
c 0
reflected
c
Hence, rate of change of momentum of the On subsitituting values, we get F = 0.18 N.
photons,
dP I 27. D
dt dA( 1) cos2
Photons c From conservation of linear momentum, both
the particles will have equal and opposite
From Newton’s third law,
momentum. The de Broglie wavelength is
given by
dP I
dt dA( 1) cos2
Surface c h
1/2 = 1
Hence, pressure exerted on surface, p
dF I
P dA( 1) cos2 28. B
dA c
Let V = speed of neutron before collision
On substituting values, we get P = 0.6 N cm-2.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 261
4E 4
(V1 – V2)2=(V1+V2)2– 4V1 V2 = V2 – z
m 3R
E
V2 – 4 0
m 32. C
1 hc
min
mV2 2E eVmax
2
1 2
mVmin = 2 × 10.2 = 20.4 eV 33. B
2
Use Moseley’s law
29. A
For the incident electron.
34. B
1
mv2 Ve 12400
2 E 18700 eV Potential 18.7 KV
0.663
p2 = 2meV
de Broglie wavelength of incident electron, 1227 0
Kv 0.01A
v
h h
1 =
p 2mVe
hc
Shortest X-ray wavelength, 2 =
Ve
1 Ve 1 V e
2 c 2mVe c 2 m
104
1.8 1011
2 1
0.1
3 108 10
or 1 : 2 = 1 : 10
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
262 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. A,C 7. A, D
hv T1 n13
ev 0 hv v0 n1 2n2 Check options
e T2 n23
i.e. v0 depends on frequency of incident light
and work function (emitter property)
8. A,C,D
If same energy released in y-direction then
2. B,C
same of the incident wavelength is missing
Photocurrent depends on no. of photons in A.
following on collector-plate only.
Ratio M.W. Infrared Visible Regions.
3. A,B,C U.V. X-Ray f
Existence of cut-off frequency and B will contain same visible and infrared light.
photoemission takes place even when
internsity is low.
9. A,C,D
5. A,B If K 20.4 ev
E 0,10.2ev ,12.09ev
6. A,C,D E 0, 7ev ,
loss 0
13.6 z 2
122.4 z2 9 z 3
1
so elastic collision
if (K.E.) > 20.4ev
Its energy level are
-30.6 ev then if loss = 0 then elastic
-
91.8 ev & otherwise inelastic collision
If e have K.E. energy
-122.4 ev
= 125 ev
11. A,B,D
The energy of each photon is hc/, so that
then energy of average electron the number of photons released per unit time
= 125 - 122.4 = 2.6ev is W/(hc/). These photons are spread out
in all directions over an area 4a2, so that
the ‘share’ of an area S is a fraction S/4a2
of the total number of photons emitted.
The maximum energy of emitted
photoelectrons is
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 263
12. A,D
hc 1
Emax = hc–= – = (hc--) Minimum wavelength decreases.
Intensity Increases.
The stopping potential is given by
eVs = Emax
13. A,B
E 1
Hence, Vs = max (hc ) 12400
e e min min 0.62 Å min 62pm
20000
Hence, choice (c) is incorrect.
12 & 45 pm will be absent
For photoemission to be possible, we have
hc > .
14. A,B,C
hc hc
Hence, or
15. B,C
Thus, the permitted range of values of is Lyman series lies in the ultraviolet region,
Balmer series in visible region, and Paschen
hc
0 series in infrared region.
C. R > Y >B > V
Hence, the correct choices are (a), (b), and
(d).
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
264 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
2. (a) 2.25 eV (b) 4.2 eV (c) 2.0 eV, 0.5 eV 1.8 1019
no of e emitted 10 1
5 109
4.25 A Ta ...............(1)
4.7 B Tb .................(2) i = 0.36 × 109 × 1.6 × 10-19
Tb (Ta 1.5)...............(3)
i 5.76 1011 A
h
a ...............(4)
2 Me Ta
6. 940.96 V
h
b ...............(5) Here, l = 0.4 Å = 0.4 × 10–10 m
2 Me Tb
Let V be the required voltage. Then,
By 45
h
given b 2a 2meV
a 12.27
4 a 4 b or in Å
b V
by (3)
12.27
0.4
1 V
b ev & a 4 b
2
or V 30.675
by (1) & (2)
or V = (30.675)2 = 940.96 V
A 2.25ev
A 4.2ev
7. Photon
Let be the de Broglie wavelength of the
3. 0.6 Volt, 2.0 mA
electron and the photon. If m and v are the
i nef mass and velocity of the electron, then de
I 1 Broglie wavelenght of the electron
sn
4 r 2 hf
i1 r22 h
mv
i 2 r12
The photon has got zero rest mass. Therefore,
2
18 mA 0.6 energy of the photon is totally kinetic in
2
i2 0.6 nature. Since the wavelength of the photon
i 2 2 mA is same as that of the electron, the kinetic
energy of the photon having wavelength ,
I same so V0 will remain same.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 265
h 13.2
V
2me mc
Taking m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg, we have
13. 7 : 36
6.62 1034
For Balmer series
2 9.1 1031 8.0 1015
n 5 2
6.62 1034 1 1 1
5.485 1012 m Rz 2 2 2
1.207 1022 1 2 5
The resolving power of microscope is inversely
proportional to the wavelength of the
14. 18/5R
radiation used. Since wavelength of the
yellow light is 5990 Å, i.e., 5.99 × 10-7 m, E m
power of electron microscope is 105 times as
large as that of the optical microscrope. 1 1 1
Rz 2 2 2
nc n13
9. –h/e Et2
1 1 1
h h 2R 5 2 2
2 3
mv 1 eE 2 18
2meE t
2 m 5R
h
eEt
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
266 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
3 13.6 13.6
K 1.38 10 23 300 E4 EnB 2
2 42 nB
= 6.2 × 10–21 J
6.2 1021 1 1
13.6 2
eV 0.04 eV n 16
1.6 101 B
17. Z=2&n=5
E1 E1
Maximum energy is liberated from transition E4 E2
16 4
En 1 and minimum energy for En En–1.
Hence, 3
2.7eV E1
E1 16
E1 52.224 eV
n2 Thus, the ionization energy of the given atom
is 14.4 eV.
E1 E1 c. Maximum energy of the emitted photon is
1.224 eV
n2 n 12 for the electron transition n = 4 to
n = 1, i.e.,
Solving the above equationss simultaneously,
we get E1 15
E4 E1 E1 E1
E1 = –54.4 eV and n = 5 16 16
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 267
22. 6210 eV
15
14.4 13.5 eV
16 12420
E K 6210ev
Thus, the maximum energy of the emitted 2
photon is 13.5 eV. Minimum energy of the
12420
emitted photon corresponds to the transition EK 12420ev
1
n = 4 to n = 3, i.e.
for L transition
E1 E1 7
E4 E3 E1 (from n=3 to n=2)
16 9 144
Energy diff. = 6210 ev.
7
14.4 0.7 eV 23. during combination = 3.365 eV; after
144
combination = 3.88 eV (5 3) & 2.63 eV
(4 3)
19. One electron having kinetic energy nearly
11.6 eV 1240
E 3.1ev
Total energy received by the atom will be 400
25.2 eV. 13.6 eV energy is needed to remove W .f . 1.9 ev
the electron from the attraction of the (KE )m 1.2 ev
nucleus. Rest of the energy will be almost z2
13.6
available in the form of KE of electron. n2
4
13.6 2.176 ev
20. E 1 < E2 25
Photon Energy 2.17 1.2
3.37 ev
E1
H atom 24. 62.5 × 10–12, 192.5 × 10–12
Case I hc hc
E
1 2
E2
H atom
2 1 130 x 1012 m
Case II
EK EK EL L
hfK hfK hfL
K
fK fK fL L
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
268 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
hc hc
1011 Energy of photon E = E
No. of Photo electron = 105 sec1 0.5 10 – 9
106
(C) Due to in Potential of the sphere the spacecraft will acquire momentum in the
opposite direction according to law of
Potential becomes 2V0. Energy required is 2
conservation of momentum.
eV extra the n
No. of photons per sec. from laser = n.
e– stops.
Then from energy considerations,
kq
(D) 2V
r c
0.5 × 10–3 = nh
9 x 109 x q
Z n = (0.5 × 10–3)/(ch)
8 x 10 3
Rate of change of momentum of spacecraft
16 x 10 12 8
10 h h
no. of e ejected =
9 x 1.6 x 10 19 9 = np = n = (0.5 × 10–3)
ch
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 269
But v = at
Now this energy is used to liberated photo
v 1000
So t = = sec electron from H atom then
a 1 1 11
10
1000 6 1
mv 2 ( 40.80 13.6 ) 27.20 eV
= 6 × 10 17
sec. 2
FB = q v × 6. 489.6 eV, 25.28 Å
B = qvB sin
In our case FB = qvB 1 1 1
Rz 2 2 2
[as = 90º] n1 n 2
mv 2
Hence, Bqv = or mv = qBr 1 1 1
r 1.097 10 7 z 2
2 3
The de Broglie wavelength
12400 12400
h h 68 = 182 .35 Å
= = 68
mv qBr
10 10 1 1
particle q p rp 1.097 10 7 z 2
182 .35 4 9
proton = q r
10 3 36
r q z 2 z2 = 36 z = 6
200 5
Since r = 1 and qp = 2
p
z
v 2.18 10 6 13 .08 10 6 m / s
1 n
p = 2
1 1
K.E. = mv 2 9.1 10 – 31 171.08 10 21
2 2
5. 3.1 × 106 m/s
K.E. = 778 × 10–19
First line of lyman series means n 2= 2,
Ionisation energy = (13.6) (z)2 = 13.6 × 36
n1 = 1 eV = 489.6 eV
1 1 1 12400
Rz 2 2 2 ' 25 .28 Å
1 2 489 .6
1 1
1.097 10 7 2 2 1
4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
270 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
v 95 x 4
6.36 eV
5
The same way for 48.36 eV
n He
+ v1
8. n=2
r n2
v2
5.3 10 –11 1
= 2
21.2 10 –11 n
n2 = 4 , n = 2
v0
4M KE TE 3.4 ev
m v1
p2
3.4 ev
2m
p 1024
v
6.67 10 34
h
p 10 24
10
(b) 40.8 x 10 1019 6.634 x 1034 x f 6.6 10 m
9.846 x 1015 Hz
10. 0.61 Å
48.36 x 1.6 1019 6.634 x 10 34
12400
min
f 11.6 x 10 Hz15 20 10 3
min 0.62 Å
7.56 x 1.6 x 10-19 = 6.634 x 10-34
(a)
V V ...(1)
4
4mv mv
V
V ....(2)
4
1 1 v2 3K
mv20 4m 0 48.75
2 2 16 4 4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 271
1. C
1 1
E(2 1) Rhc 2 0.75 Rhc
h (1) (2)2
We know
mv
1 1
1 (mv)2 E(13) Rhc 2 2
0.9Rhc
and K mv2 (3) (1)
2 2m
Thus, III transition gives most energy. I tran-
mv 2mK
sition represents the absorption of energy.
h 1
Thus,
4. D
2mK K
as will increases K max will decreases so
current should decreases and dfinally fall to
1 K1 K1
(K2 2K1 ) 0 when 0 is achieved.
2 K2 2K1
5. B
1 1 1
or or 2 The photoelectric effect is an instantaneous
2 2 2
phenomenon (experimentally proved). It takes
approximate time of the order of 10-10 s.
2. B
6. A
I2 (r1 )2 1
as I 2 hv0 =6.2 eV, eVo = 5 eV
I1 (r2 )2 r
From Einstein's photoelectric equation
hv = hv0 +eV0 = 6.2 + 5 = 11.2 eV
I2 (1)2
I1 1 2 hc
11.2 eV
2
0
I2 = 4I1 hc
or 1108.9 A
Now, since number of electrons emitted per 11.2
second is directly proportional to intensity, Which belongs to ultra - violet region.
so number of electrons emitted by
photocathode would increase by a factor of 4.
7. B
Since, nuclear target is heavy, it can be
3. A assumed, safely that it will remain stationary
and will not move due to the Coulombic
1 1
E Rhc 2 2 interaction force.
n1 n2 At distance of closest approach, relative
velocity of two particles is v.
1 1 Here, target is considered as stationary, so
E(43) Rhc 2 2 0.05Rhc
3 4 –particles comes to rest instantaneously at
distance be closest approach. Let required
distance be r, then from work–energy
1 1
E(42) Rhc 2 2 0.2Rhc
2 4
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
272 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
theorem,
nh
mvrn from Bohr's theory.
mv 2
1 Ze 2e 2
0
2 40 r on solving, rn n and Tn is independent of n.
1
r
m 14. B
1
1 mv2 eVo 1.68 eV
or r or r Ze2 2
v2
hc 1240 ev nm
hv 3.1 eV
8. D 400 nm
The momentum of the photon 3.1 eV = W0 + 1.6 eV
h hv W0 = 1.42 eV
P
c
15. D
9. C
1 1
Emission spectrum would rises when electron It corresponds to least value of 2 2 i.e.,,
makes a jump from higher energy levels to n1 n2
lower energy level, from Paschen, Bracket and Pfund series. Thus
Frequency of emitted photon is proportional the transition corresponds to 53
to change in energy of two energy levels, ie,
16. A
1 1
v RcZ 2 2 2 4 x 103 = 1020 x hf
n1 n2
4 x 103
f 20
10 x 6.023 x 10 34
10. B
For constructive interference,
f 6.64 x 1016 Hz
h The obtained frequency lies in the band of
2d cos i = n
2meV X-rays.
On substituting values, we get,
17. D
V 50 volt
Since, the frequency of ultraviolet light is
less than the frequency of X–rays, the energy
11. B of each incident photon will be more for
Expression is given by 2 d cos i = ndB. X–rays
KEphotoelectron = hv –
12. D Stopping potential is to stop the fastest
As diffraction pattern has to be wider than photoelectron
slit width, so (d) is the correct option.
hv
V0
e e
13. B
So, KEmax and V 0 both increases. But KE
mv 2 k
given
rn rn
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 273
1 2 2
18. C RKE r ,
2
Kmax = eVo h(v v o )
m1m2
If V' = 2v where m m = reduced mass
1 2
1 1
n2h2 n2h2 (m1 m2 )n2h2
E = 13.6 Z2 n12 n22 2 2
2
8 r 2r 2m1m2r2
1 1
13 .6(3)2 2 2 24. B
1 3 = 108.8 eV
1
Energy
20. D
25. B
h h
de- Broglie wavelength ,
mv P 1
Energy
Where P = momentum n2
By conservation of momentum 1 1
h
P1 P2 0 or P1 P2 (n 1)2 n2
1 2 n2 (n 1)2 2n 1
h
(n 1)2 (n)2 n2 (n 1)2
21. C
2n 1
Davission and Germer experimentally h
n2 (n)2 n3
established wave nature of electron by
observing diffraction pattern while
bombarding electrons on Ni crystal. 26. A
hc 1 1
22. D
= Rc z2 2 2
In emission spectrum number of bright lines n1 n2
is given by
1
n(n 1) 4(4 1) z2
6
2 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
1 (1) , 2 (1) , 3 (2) , 4 (3)
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
274 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1 1 hc 1
1 : 2 : 3 : 4 = 1 : 1 : : from eqn. (1) = mv2 +
4 9 2
on putting this equ. (2)
27. D
1 4 1 2
mv’2 = mv –
mv 2 3 2
r=
qB
4
v’ > v
qBr 1.6 1019 3 104 10 103 3
v= =
m 9.1 1031
= 5.27 × 105
30. B
KEmax = 1/2 mv2
Debroglie wavelength
= 1/2 × 9.1 × 10–31 × (5.27 × 105)2
h h
126.36 1021
= P 2mE
1.6 1019
= 78.975 × 10–2 hc
ev
min
= 0.78 eV
1 1 hc
v
E = 13.6 2 2 emin
n1 n2
take log both side
1 1
= 13.6 hc
4 9 log v log log min
e
= 1.88 ev
hc
1.88 = 0.78 + log min log log v
e
= 1.1 eV
So option B is correct.
28. C
Z2 31. C
ETotal = –13.6 eV
n2 2m2u2 u1(m1 m2 )
v1 = m1 m2
KE = |ETotal|
m
0 u m
PE = 2 Etotal 2 u
v1 = =
As n decreases, Total energy decreases, 3 3
m
potential energy decreases and kinetic energy 2
increases.
2mu
4u
v2 = 3 m =
29. D 2 3
1 hc mu
mv2 = – ....(1) pA =
2 3
m 4u 2mu
1 4 hc pB = . =
mv’2 = – ....(2) 2 3 3
2 3
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 275
× n per second
pA 1
pB = 2 Pressure =
F
A
A 2
2mnv cos
B = 1 =
A
32. B 2 3.32 1027 1023 103 cos 45
=
h 2 10 4
= = 2.34 × 103 N/m2
mv
z 34. A
vn = 2.18 × 106
n Series limit frequency of lyman series = vL
For Pfund series [n = 5]
1
vn 1
n f
n n2
Now, vL
fPfund series =
1 1 1 25
= RZ2 2 2
1 n
35. C
1 1 1
= RZ2 2 2 Frequency
1 R n
1 1 1 k
R 1 2 f
2 m
1
1 k
f2
1 12 42 m
n
k = mF2 × 42
1
1 6.023 × 1023 atoms present in 108 gm
1 2
n
As n is large 108
1 atom will be present in 103
6.023 10 23
1
1 2
n
108 (1012 )2 4 9.86 10 3
k=
B 6.023 10 23
_ A+ 2
An ~
n
707.20 1024 103
33. B
= = 7.07 7.1 N/m
10 23
mH = 3.32 × 10–27 kg
n/s = 1023
wall area = 2 cm2
mv
p = 2 mv cos
Total change in momentum = F = 2 mvcos
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
276 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. C
c 1 1
v Rc(Z 1)2 2 2
1 1 2
For Ka v (z – 1) (z 1)
3
= 1.1 × 107 × 3 × 108 × (26 – 1)2
1 4
or ...(i),
(z 1)2
3
= 1.1 × 3 × 625 × × 1015
1 4
4 ...(ii)
(z'1)2 = 9.9 × 625 × 25 × 1013
= 154875 × 1012 Hz
1 (z'1)2 z'1 1
4 = 2z – 2
(z 1)2 z 1 2 5. A,C
= z – 1 2z' – 2 = 11 – 1 = 10 z = 6 Stopping potential is given by
2. A
hc 1 1 1 1
First photon will excite the atom to I excited v 12400
e 0
0
state, which when returning to ground state
will emit a photon of energy 10.2 eV second = wavelength in Å
photon will ionize the atom (13.6 eV will be 0 = Threshold value of wavelength for a
used up in this process). The extra energy particular metal.
(=15 – 13.6 = 1.4 eV) will be carried by
electron as its K.E. So a photon of energy
13.6 eV and an electron of energy 1.4 eV will 6. n = 24
be emitted. Compare the wavelength of the transition
from (n + 1)th to first n = 1 of the ion to the
de-broglie wavelength in its first orbit.
3. 2
For 0 x 1, KE = 2E0 – E0 = E0 7. B
for x > 1, KE = 2E0 both statements are correct but statement
(2) is not correct explanation of statement
1 h / P1 P KE2 2E0 (1).
2 2
2 h / P2 P1 KE1 E0
Energy of characterstic X-ray depends on
the difference in energy levels.
4. v = 1.546 × 1018 Hz
8. A
(a) Using R = R0 (A)1/3
1/3 h p2 h2
1 /3 A p= K.E. = =
(14) 2m 2m2
4
If entire K.E. of electron is converted into
A = 14 × 4 = 56 photon then
Z = A – N = 56 – 30 Z = 26
h2 hc 2mc2
0
1 2 1 1 2m2 0 h
(b) R(Z 1) 2 2
1 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 277
9. B
900
The series in uv region is Lyman series. E2 = = 1.77 eV
11R
Longest wavelength corresponds to minimum
energy which occurs in transition from n = 2 From energy level diagram of He+ atom, we
to n = 1. can see that in transition from n = 4 to n = 3,
energy of photon released will lie between E1
1/R and E2.
122 ....(1)
1 1 E43 = – 3.4 – (–6.04)
12 22 = 2.64 eV
The smallest wavelength in the infrared region Wavelength of photon corresponding to this
corresponds to maximum energy of Paschen energy,
series
12375
= Å = 4687.5 Å
264
1 /R
1 1 ....(2) = 4.68 × 10–7 m
32
13. A
from (1) and (2) = 823.5 nm.
Kinetic energy, K Z2
10. B KH 2
1 1
= =
KHe 2
4
hc
cutoff =
ev
(independent of atomic number) 14. A
n 2a
11. C a
2 n
n=2 -3.4 eV
h
n=1 -13.6 eV de Broglie
H atom p
n=4 -3.4 eV
2a h nh
p
n=3 -6.04 eV n p 2a
n=2 -13.6 eV
p2 n2h 2
E 2
n=1 +
-54.4 eV 2m 8a m
He Z = 2
15. B
12. C
Visible light lies in the range, 1 = 4000 Å to h2
E
2 = 7000 Å. Energy of photons corresponding 8a 2 m
to these wavelengths (in eV) would be :
(6.6 10 34 )2
12375 = = 8 meV
E1 = = 3.09 eV, and 8 (6.6 109 ) 2 1030 1.6 1019
4000
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
278 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
16. D 22. A
nh 1 1
mv 2 1
2a Given Rz 2 2
1 n
1 n2
nh
or v = vn 1 1 1 36
2am R(1)2 R =
6561 4 9 6561 5
17. A
1 1 1
Wavelength have energies 2.25 eV, 2.75 eV, Now R(2)2
2 4 16
3.5 eV.
In P, all cause emission, in q, only last two 16 4 6561 5
16 4
& in r, only last IP > Iq > I r . 2 = =
R 4 12 36 4 12
2 1215 Å
18. 3
h p m q 23. 7
= 8 3
2mv m p qp w.f = 4.7 eV
hc
E= = 6.2 eV
19. D
20. B KQ 9 109 Q
1.5 = 1.5
2 2
R 1 10 2
LF L
i hf
2I 2I 1 .5
Q= 10 11 No. of e–
9
h
[ 4 1] f
42 2I 1.5 10 11 150
= 19 = 10 7
I = 1.87 × 10–46 kgm2 9 1.6 10 9 16
Z=7
21. C
Icm = Ic + I0 24. 7
r p2 9 109 e 120e
2m 10 10 15
2 2
4r 3r 1.87 10 –46
12 16 h
7 7 1.63 10 – 27
& (from debroglie)
p
r = 1.3 × 10–10
solving = 7 x 10-15 = 7 fm
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 279
25. B
1 20R 9
t = 100 × 10–9 s, P = 30 × 10–3 W, 3 = 36 = 5R
C = C × 108 m s–1
Momentum 28. A
3 9
Pt 30 10 1000 10 12400
= = E1 = =5eV
C 3 108 2480
12400
= 1.0 × 10–17 kg ms–1 E2 = = 4eV
3100
26. 1 5 = + 4k .....(1)
Relation hv = hv0 + KE = hv0 + ev0
4=+k .....(2)
h
so V0 e(v v ) On solving
0
11
h hv = = 3.66 = 3.7 eV
V0 v 0 3
e e
This is the form of y = mx + c
h 29. B
slope m
e By Mosley’s Law :
hv0 f = a (z – 1)
any y – intercept =
e
Slope of this graph is h/e. The slope does no c
work function so the required no. 1. As v = f f =
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
280 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1 1 nh
h 3 108 Ln
0.3 106 0.4 106 2
L n n 1 1
= 1.3×10–19 [2 – 1] Relative change =
L n n
0.4 106 0.3 106
h 3 108
0.3 0.4 1012 32. 6
n=1 –13.6
31. A,B,D
orbital :
12375
= 12.75 eV
r 970
& relative change
r
Now we known that :
n2
rn 0.529 The energy gap corresponding to the given
Z
wavelenght is same as for n = 4 to n = 1.
n 12 n2
n n 1
n2 Now for spectral lines =
2
n2 1 2n n2
n2 4 4 1
= 6 Lines
1 2n 1 2
2
n n
dependent on n. 33. C
2
z
En 13.6 hc
n2 eV
ph
E
Re lative change =
E hc
v
phe e
1 1
n 12 n2
h
1 e
n2 2mE
n2 n2 1 2n n2 h
2
e
2
n n 1 1 2meV
1 2n
34. 5
n 12
Vi Z2
1 2n 6.25 13.6
Vf n2
n2 1 2n
1 2n n2f n
6.25 f 2.5 Min. value of nf
n2 1 2n n2 1 2n n2i ni
Doesn’t match with ‘C’ =5
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-I | 281
35. B 37. 3
1 hc
mv2 = KE = – 0 1 3
2 E 2–1 13.6 z 2 1 – 13.6 z 2
4 4
h h
p = mv = v = m
d d
1 1 5
E3–2 13.6 z 2 – 13.6 z 2
h 2
C1 4 9 36
1 hc C
m 2 2 = – 0 2 = 2 – 0
2 m d ld
E 2–1 E 3– 2 74.8
2C1 C2 (Δλ) d ( d ) 3
(d) = – = 3 5
( d )3 λ2 2 13.6 z 2 13.6 z 2 74.8
4 36
36. 24
3 5
Power = nh 13.6 z 2 – 74.8
4 36
(n = number of photons per second)
KE = 0, h = (h = + KEmax) z2 = 9
200 = n[6.25 × 1.6 × 10–19 Joule] z = +3 ans
200
n
1.6 10 –19 6.25
As photon is just above threshold frequency
KEmax is zero and they are accelrated by
potential difference of 500V.
KEf = qV
p2
q p 2mqV
2m
Since efficiency is 100%, number of
electrons = number of photons per second
As photon is completely absorbed force
exerted = nmv
200
2 9 10 –31 1.6 10 –19 500
6.25 1.6 10 –19
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
282 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Modern Physics-II
1. C
4 3 1 /3 15
All neutrons attract each other with the same V 3 R ,R R 0A ,R 0 1.25 10
strong nuclear force. So, the strong nuclear
force holds together three protons and one D = 2×1017 kg m-3
3
neutron Li just as vigourously as it holds 6. C
4
together two protons and two neutrons 1
1 a.m.u. = [mass of one 6c12]
12
4
2 He . Specifically, protons electrostatically For C A 12
repel other protons. This repulsion tries to
7. B
4 A
make a nucleus fly apart. Since He contains X A X 2A Y
2
E2 – 2 E1 = Q
only two protons. The attractive strong
nuclear forces overcome the repulsion of the
8. C
protons. Hence, the nucleus holds together.
4 3B A e
But it Li , the mutual repulsion of the three
3
protons overcomes the strong nuclear Eb Ea
attractions and the nucleus falls apart (or
e = Ea – 3Eb 3Eb = Ea – e
undergoes radioactive decay into a more
stable nucleus). Therefore, the answer will
9. B
into a more stable nucleus. Therefore, the
Energy = BE of Products – BE of Reactants
answer will be (c).
(8.2 × 110 + 8.2 × 90) – 7.4 × 200
2. A = 160 MeV
Isotopes A and C have same number of
protons. 10. C
Energy released = (80×7+120×8–200×6.5
3. B = 220MeV)
Nuclear forces are charge independent.
11. A
4. B For X : energy = 200 × 7.4 = 1480 MeV
Fast neutrons can be easily slowed down by For A : energy = 110 × 8.2 = 902 MeV
passing them through water. This is because
For B : energy = 80 × 8.1 = 648 MeV
of comparable masses the energy passed by
Energy released=(902+648) – 1480
neutron to water modelcule is high.
= 1550 – 1480 = 70 MeV
5. B
Nuclear density of an atom of mass number A, 12. D
Energy released
27
mass A(1.67 10 ) E = total binding energy of 2He4 – 2 (total
D
volume 4 binding energy of 1H2)
[1.25 1015 A1/ 3 ]3
3 = 4 × 7.0 – 2 (1.1) (2) = 23.6 MeV
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 283
13. B 20. D
The gamma photon corresponding to the
R1 Noe T1 = N1
energy difference will be captured so that
R 2 No e T2 = N2 energy on reactant and product side is equal.
(939 + 940 - 1876)
R1 R2 = 3 MeV (Captures)
Atoms decayed N1-N2 = R1 R 2
21. B
14. A
A 50 Mev
As there is no further disintegration of product K.E = 48 MeV
(A 4)
hence decay constant is Zero.
0.96 × 50 MeV = 48 MeV
15. C A = 100
A N
22. C
0.693
0.693
2
t
A1 N0e 226 206
2 88 R a 82 Pb x y
0.693
226 = 206 + 4x
0.693 t
A2 N0 e 4 x=5
4
A1
0.693 0.693
t t 23. A
4 2
2e
A2 As the alpha particle decays, the daughter
nucleus recoils. In such a process, the
1 0.693 momentum conservation holds good.
e–0.693 = = 2e 2 = 2
2 So,
Pa = PD = P
16. C
P2 P2
K = and KD
N0 2M 2MD
N1 N0 e t = N0e1 =
e
As MD > M ,
so, K > KD.
17. B
19. B
Two smaller nuclei combining to form a larger
nucleus is called a Fusion reaction.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
284 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. A 6. B
It is difficult to over come attractive forces Number of atoms in 2 kg fuel
2
2. A =6.02×1026 = 5.12×1024
235
We know that
Fission rate = Number of atoms fissioned in
1
3
one second
R RoA
5.12 1024
Surface area R 2
30 24 60 60
1 2
(R o A 3 )2 R 20 A 3 = 1.975×1018s-1
Each fission gives 185 MeV. Hence, energy
obtained in one second.
3. C
P = 185×1.975×1018MeV s-1
1
m 10 mp ( 20 10)mn
1 = 185×1.975×1018 ×1.6×10-19Js-1
A0 2B0
m12 2m11
5. C 1 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 285
10. C 12. B
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
286 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
5. B,C
2. B,C
Statement (a) is incorrect. The 2He4 nucleus
(B) R 3 A (or the -particle) is exceptionaly stable and
has a much higher value of BE per ucleon
Volume A
than that for most other light nuclei.
Mass A
Statement (b) is correct but the reason of
Density is independent of mass number A decrease in binding energy is different for
In other words, we can say that to break energy absorbed = 2 × 1.1 MeV = 2.2 meV
the nucleus into its constituent particles, energy released = 7 MeV
some energy is needed to be supplied. This So net energy released per nucleon
energy is termed as binding energy of the = 7 – 2.2= 4.8 MeV
nucleus. So total energy released
For (a), more is the binding energy per = 4.8 × 4 = 19.2 MeV
nucleon, more is the energy required to break
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 287
my
8. ABC Te QQ
me my
Recall nucleus theory
N 1
N/2 ratio becomes
9. C,D Z1
14
7 N n 73Li +He24+4n+2+
12. A,B,C
14
7 N n 73Li +4p+4n
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
288 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
1. 2 5. 4.0016 u
( 2 mp 2 mn m)
2. 7.02 fermi
m = 4.001592 A.M.U.
16
Mass number of 8 O nucleus, A1 = 16
Nuclear radius of 16
nucleus,R1=3×10–15 m 6. 492 MeV
8 O
56
or R1 = 3 fermi The no.of protons is 26 fe 26
MeV 2
3. 2.48 × 10–12 m = 24.990432u 24.985839u 2 0.511 2 C
C
E = 2 x 0.5 = 1MeV
= (0.004593)-(931 Mev u )-1.022 MeV
E hc 1.24 x 1012 MeVm
2 = 3.254 Mev
4. 28 MeV
B 1 H 2 1.1MeV
22 H1 2 He 4 23.6 MeV B 2
He4 7.0 MeV
1.1 x 2 x 2.2 E 4.4 Energy release= 4(7.0) - 4(1.1)
= 28 - 4.4 = 23.6 MeV
E = 28 MeV
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 289
A A 0 e t 500 = 600 e t 32
P 32 S e v
Ln6 / 5 Ln(6 / 5)
m 2 10 3 A.M.U
t 40 min
E = 1.862 MeV
ln2 ln2
Half life t1 /2 40 =152 min
ln6 / 5
40
14. (A) 19 K 40 –
20 Ca e ,
40
19
40
K 18 Ar e ,
10. 4.5 × 1010 y old 40
19 K e – 18
40
Ar
ln 2
(B) 1.3034 MeV, 0.4676 MeV, 1.490 MeV
4.5 x 10 9
(A)
No of U238 atoms = Nu No of Pb206 atoms = Npb
40
19 K 40 –
20 Ca e ,
40
19
40
K 18 Ar e ,
Nu = Npb Nu= Noe-t
e-t = 1-e-t t = ln2 40
K e – 18
40
Ar
19
9
t = 4.5 x 10 y
(B) 1.3034 MeV, 0.4676 MeV, 1.490 MeV
40 e
19 K 40
20 Ca 1
40 40
11. (i) 19 K 18 Ar 1 e0 v ,
E = m (931) MeV 1.3034 MeV
(ii) 4.2 × 109 years
40 40
19 K 18 Ar 1e0
15. 5.304 MeV
0.693
N N0et m931 MeV E
1.4 10 9
particle energy = E - 217 Kev
1 8 et
l n5
k = m( 238 PU ) m( 234 U) m( 4 He) c 2
12. t
ln 2 = (238.04955u - 234.04095u - 4.002603u)
931MeV
Given R R 0 et = 5.58 MeV
u
No of atom dissociated in time t = 80%
80N0
N0 1 et 4 5 5 et
100
5 et 1 ln5 t
ln5 ln5
t
ln2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
290 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
mp m nN 2
Now Q K p 1 – K11 1
m N' nN1 nN 2 e t
m0 0 e – t
mass of radon m
2. v = ut
AN' A Ane t .R 2
1 = nN 2 e t
TAvg. = NA NA NA
Given that A = 222, n = 4000,
dN T = 3.8 days t = 7.6 days
= fraction of body disintegrate
N
0.693
in time dt e t e 3 .8
5
2.49 ,
dN R2 = 1.2 × 106 sec
dt
N
m = 3.3 g
dm dv
or dt or dt
m v
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 291
Rate of decay N
A 1 238
1.01
A 2 235
N
m
Rate of formation Number of atoms N =
A
N1 N0 e – 1t
e ( 2 – 1 ) t ...(ii)
N (1 – e – t ) N2 N0 e – 2 t
Equation (i) & (ii) we have
Number of nuclei formed in time t = t
& Number of nuclei left after time 140
e ( 2 – 1 ) t
1.01
t= (1 – e – t )
A (2 – 1)t = n (140) – n (1.01)
8 .4 8.4
N 6.54 10 18
0.6931
T 1.7 10 10 year
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
292 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 293
10. B 1 M 2 1 M 2
mc2 . v1 . v2 ...(ii)
Binding energy 2 2 2 2
BE = (Mnucleus- Mnucleoun)c2 = (M0-8MP-9Mn)c2 M 2
mc2 v1
2
11. B 2mc 2
v12
0.693 1 M
T1 / 2 (X) ( Y )
x Y 2m
v1 c
x M
or Y Y x
0.693
17. B
So Y will decay faster than X.
1 2
N1 No No No
3 3
12. B
2 1
Statement I is correct and statement II is N2 No No No
3 3
wrong can be directly concluded from Binding
n
energy/nucleon curve. N1 1
n 1
N2 2
13. A t 2 t1 one half life 20 min .
1st reaction is fusion and 4th reaction is fission
18. C
14. B In particle situation, at least three particles
In positive beta decay a proton is transformed take place in transformation, so energy of
into a neutron and a positron is emitted. -particle +energy of third particle = E1-E2
p n0 e Hence, energy of -particle E1 E2
Number of neutrons initially was A-Z
19. A
Number of neutrons after decay (A-Z)-3 × 2
According to given date, mass of neutron
(due to alpha particles) +2×1 (due to positive and proton are equal which do not permit
beta decay) the breaking up to neutron and proton.
The number of protons will reduce by 8 But if we take standard mass of neutron as
[as 3 × 2 (due to alpha particles] + 2 (due 1.6750 × 10–27 kg, then
to positive beta decay)] Energy released = Mass defect × c2
Hence, atomic number reduces by 8. = (mn – mp – me) × c2
So, the ratio of number of neutrons to that [ energy released mass of reactant – mass
of protons of product × c2]
Number of neutrons initially was A-Z 1.6750 1027 1.6725 1027 9 1031
A Z4 1.66 1027
Z8 × 931.5 MeV [ 1 amu = 931.5 MeV]
15. C 16 1031
931.5 MeV
After decay, the daughter nuclei will be more 1.66 1027
stable hence, binding every per nucleon will 1.6 0.9315
MeV 0.9 MeV
be more than that of their parent nucleus. 1.66
which is close to option (A).
16. B
Conserving the momentum 20. D
For damped harmonic motion,
M M
0 v1 v2 ma = -kx - mbv
2 2 or ma +mbv +kx = 0
v1 v 2 ...(i) Solution to above equation is
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
294 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
bt
k b2 4 hc
x A oe 2
sin t; with 2
E (E)
m 4 3 2
Where amplitude drops exponentially with E hc
time. 3 2
b
i.e., A A e
2
hc E
o
2
Average time is that duration when amplitude 3
hc E
drops by 63% i.e., becomes A0/e.
1
b
Ao
1 1
Thus, A A oe 2
e 2 3
b 2
or 1 or
2 b 24. B
Ist case
21. C v=0
TA = 20 min TB = 40 min
after 80 min
2m m 2m
N N N N mv = mv1 + 2mv2
NA = 40 = 0 NB = 20 = 0
2 16 2 4 v1 + 2v2 = v ....(1)
15 3 v2 v1
1=
A decayed = N0 B decayed = N0 v0
16 4
v2 – v1 = v v1 = v2 – v
15 4 5
Ratio = × = 2
16 3 4 2v2 + v1 = v v1 = v–v
3
22. C 4
3v2 = 2v v1 = –
A
B T 3
ln2 2
v2 = v
T 3
NA = N0e–t
1 1 v2
NB = N0 (1 – e–t) mv2 m
KE 2 2 9 1 8
NB Pd = = 1 =1– =
0.3 KE mv2 9 9
NA 2
= 0.888 = 0.89
N 0 (1 e t ) Second case
0.3
N 0e t u v=0 v1 v2
m 12 m m 12 m
1 – e–t = 0.3 e– t
mv = mv1 + 12mv2
1 = 1.3 e–t
v1 + 12 v2 = v ....(1)
1 v2 – v1 = v
e t
1.3 13v2 = 2v v1 = v2 – v
1 l n2 2 2
log t = t v2 = v v1 = v – v =
13 13
1.3 T
11v
Tlog1.3
t= 13
log 2
2
1 1 11 2
23. A mv2 m v
2 2 13 (11)2
hc Pc = 1 =1–
2E (E) mv 2 (13)2
1 2
hc
E 169 121
1 Pc = = 0.28
169
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Modern Physics-II | 295
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
296 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
17. D 22. C
The KE of elctron will lie in the range 0 to 15
7 N 7(11H) 8(10 n)
0.8 × 106 eV.
BE(N) = 0.123986 × 931.5 = 115.492959 MeV
18. 4 15
O 8(11H) 7(10 n)
8
= (1 – e–t ) = (1 – e–.04 ) 4% 3 e2
= [8(7)–7 (6)] R = 3.42 fm
5 4 ε 0 R
19. C
6
Li 6.015123 u 23. C
3
4
He 4.002603 u 64 = 26
2
2
H 2.014102 u the material should decay for 6 half
1
6 2 4
lines for a safe laboratory.
3 Li 1 H + 2 He
(Not possible) Thus answer = 18 × 6 = 108 days
less more
mass mass
210 1 209
24. 9
Po H + 83 Bi
84 1
(Not possible) * 0
less more –1
mass mass
2
4.041MeV
1 H + 24He 3
6
Li Suppose – has (KE)max. = k
more less (Possible)
mass mass
Total energy released, E = 931 (m) MeV
Mass defect, m = (12.014 – 12) 931.5
70
30 Zn + 3482Se 64
152
Gd = 13.04 MeV
less more (Not possible)
Now, E = 4.041 + K
mass mass
K = E – 4.041 = 9 MeV
20. A 25. 5
210 206
84 Po 82 Pb + 24He A = A0e–t
M = 0.005818 u 0.7 11.5
115 2.4 105
8 24
( M)c2 = 5.419467 MeV ~ 5420 KeV 3
e
2.5 10 V
206 0.7 11.5
K(Alpha) = (5420) 115V
8 24
210 e
2.4 2.5 102
= 5316 KeV ~ 5319 KeV e–0.0419 = 19.167×10-2
1 – 0.0419 = 19.167×10-2 V
21. C
0.95 100
(P) Alpha Decay V = 5 Litre
19.167
234
u238
92 90 Th He24 (2)
+
(Q) B decay 26. A,C
232 212
15 15 90 Th is converting into 82 Pb
8 O 7 N 1 0 (1)
Change in mass number (A) = 20
(R) Fission
is only brought by
n
(4) 1.5 unstable
239 140
Pu 57 La 99 20
94 37
p no of particle = =5
(S) Proton Emission 4
185 184 Due to 5 particle, z will change by 10 unit
83 Bi
82 Pb + Proton (3)
Since given chagne is 8, therefore no. of
particle is 2
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Semi Conductor | 297
SEMI CONDUCTOR
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
1. B 17. D
By theory of energy bands = ene e
6.24
2. B ne =
e e 1.6 10–19 3900
3. C ne = 1016/cm3
12400 18. A
E
As the concentration of electron is more than
that of holes so the semicondutor is N-type
12400
E= 2.1 eV = e[nee + nhh]
5890
= 1.6 × 10–19
[(8 × 1018 × 2.3) + (5 × 1018 × 0.01)]
4. B = 1.6 × 10–19 18.45 × 1018
By theory of forbidden energy gap = 29.52 × 10–1 = 2.952
5. A 1 1
= = 0.33875
Specific resistance 2.952
~ 0.34 m
l
R=
A 19. D
R = ne(e+ h)
As TR = 2 × 1019 × 1.6 × 10–19 (0.36 + 0.14)
= 1.6 ( – m)–1
6. C l l
R=
A A
7. D 0.5 10–3 25
As temperature increases resistance R=
1.6 10–4 8
of p increases this is property of conductor
As temperature increases resistance of Q v 2 16
i=
decreases this is property of semiconductor R 25 / 8 25
i = 0.64 A
8. D
20. A
9. A
V 0.5
E = 106 v/m
10. B d 5 10–7
= 1 × 106 v/m
11. C
21. B
12. B Without an external bias, an electric field
exists which points from n to p side and
13. C opposes any diffusion of electrons
14. C 22. A
15. A 23. A
16. A 24. A
When temperature increases no. of electron
increases hence no. of collision increases 25. B
there by drift velocity decreases
26. D
27. A
28. C
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
298 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
29. D 36. C
(i) VA = – 10V, VB = – 5V
30. B D1, D3 R.B. open
and D2 F.B. short
31. D R R
RAB(i) = R
X Y 4 4
As In
Pentavalent Trivalent R 3R
= R =
V group III group 2 2
N-type p-type (ii) VA = – 5V, VB = – 10V
D1, D3 FB
X – N type D2 RB
y – p type
R R R
reverse biased RAB(ii) = =R
4 2 4
32. B
1 Reverse bias (iii) VA = – 4V, VB = – 12V
2 F.B. 3 R.B. D1, D3 FB
4 F.B. D2 RB.
5 F.B R R R
RAB(iii) = R
4 2 4
33. A (ii) = (iii) < (i)
R.B. 37. A
34. B = e [ne . e + nh . h]
F.B. But nh . h negligible
= e nee
i 5 = 1.6 × 10–19 × ne × 3900
ne = 8 × 1015/cm3
5V
38. A
Zener diode in reverse bias work as a
voltage stabilizer.
So it will maintain a voltage of 6V across
itself and as V0 is in parallel with diode,
V0 = 6V
5
i A
50 39. B
35. B F.B.
Voltage drop across diode = 0.5 V
Maximum power rating of diode = 100 mW D1
= 100 × 10–3 W RB
VS = 1.5V D2
VD2
As; P=
RD 6V
0.52
RD = = 2.5
100 10–3
Current through diode ;
VD 0.5
ID = 0.2 A
R D 2.5
1.5
Total resistance = 7.5
0.2 Req = 50 + 150 + 100 = 300
Total resistance = R + RD
6
7.5 = R + 2.5 i= 0.02 amp
R = 5 300
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Semi Conductor | 299
40. A 44. C
Input AC current
D1
FB
input AC current
RB
t
D2
Output AC
current
6V t
E0 ~ R
6V 100 ||
d
42. C 0
43. C
For F.W.R.
Fundamental freq. = 2 × [Freq. of input]
= 2 × 50
= 100 Hz.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
300 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
47. B 55. B
Diode 2 will conduct only for – ve (B) For CE
half cycle Output collector & input is base
Its output will be B, D
VC ICR C
voltage gain =
48. C VB IBR B
RC 24
= . = 0.6 × = 4.8
i
0
0 sin d RB 3
iout(avg) =
56. D
d
0 By theory of amplifier.
52. B q n.e.
I =
10 – (245 × 103 × 40 × 10–6) – VBE = 0 t t
VBE = 10 – 9.8 I n
= 0.2 V
IC nC 98
Current transfer ratio =
53. D IE nE 100
C 16.5 – 9 10–3 = 0.98
= =
IB (200 – 100) 10–6
61. A
= 75 IE = IB + IC
IE = 100 × 10–6 + 9 × 10–3
54. B = 0.1 mA + 9 mA
In the figure there is only one connection at = 9.1 mA
base so it cannot be common base it can
either be a CE or CC 62. A
Also; in case of CC transistor is in
saturation mode so its cannot work as an Voltage gain
Current gain =
amplifier. Re sis tan ce gain
But in case of CE transitor is in active mode
2800
so it would at as on amplifier =
3000
= 0.93
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Semi Conductor | 301
63. C 69. C
By theory of gates Truth table for NAND Gate
64. B
By theory of gate's A B X
0 0 1
65. A 0 1 1
For 1st combination 1 0 1
C = A.A B.B 1 1 0
A.A. = A & B.B. = B
C = A.B
70. C
C = A B
C=A +B Y = A B
It is an OR gate A .B
For 2nd combination = A.B.
C = A.B . A.B AND gate
C = A.B. AB 71. B
C = AB + AB Truth table of OR gate :
C = AB
Its an AND gate
A B X
66. D 0 0 0
Case - I : 0 1 1
A=B= C=0 1 0 1
output of G1 = A + B
=0+0 1 1 1
= 0
output G2 = 0.0
72. A
= 0 =1 By theory of oscillator
Case-2
A= B=1&C=0 73. B
output of G1 = A + B By theory of transistors
=1+1=1
output of G2 = 1.0
= 0 =1
67. C
(A) 1.0 = 0
(B) 1 0 = 1 = 0
(C) 0.1 0 1
(D) 0(XNOR)1 = 0
68. A
If NAND gate is shorted at input side then
it acts as an NOT gate.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
302 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
9. A
Impurity level below the conduction band
= 32 meV
As evident from circuit PN junction is for-
= 0.032 eV ward biased
And forbidden energy gap for semi conductor
~1 eV between conduction & valence band. 7
i
Impurity level is close to conduction band 700
and this happens for n-type semiconductor i = 10 mA
C.B. 14. B
0.032 eV In circuit 1 ; one junction is reverse biased
Forbidden and one is forward biased. Thats why this
energy circuit has different potential drops across
gap junction.
V.B.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Semi Conductor | 303
15. C
Vm Vrms 2
Reverse biased
Vm = 2 200 ~ 283 V
As we can see input is A.C.
So, for positive half cycle
Diode will be forward bias
hence Vc = 283 V.
For – ve half cycle. 0 –6
Diode will be reverse bias but,
(C)
Capacital has charged during the positive PN
half cycle, so even when the circuit is open
circuit, there will be a voltage across
capacitor = 283 V.
Forward biased
16. C
Resistance of conductor increases with 10 V
increase in temperature
17. C
For – 10 V (D)
Diode is reverse biased, so circuit is open, N P
hence zero voltage across RL. 5V 10
5
For + 10 V
Diode is forward biased, so diode is short, Forward biased
so voltage across RL will be 10 V.
20. B
10V
+ V–
18. D
As we can see from figure ; diode is reverse
biased, so circuit will be open circuit, so zero
current will flow. R
In this circuit P - n junction is forward
19. B biased, so capacitor will get discharged
(after time t)
N P vve–t/RC = Ve–RC/RC
(A)
– 10V – 10 –5
V V
e
VC
charge : Q =
e
– 5V + –
Forward biased
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
304 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
o t
I
Si1 26. C
10V
As we can analysis from circuit that
Si2 diode is forward biased.
Hence equivalent circuit resistance
Req = 10 + (10 || 10)
As we can see Si 1 diode will be F.B. and Si2
= 15 k
will be R.B.
So the branch containing diodes will be open 30
i 2mA
circuted. 15 103
Hence, 10 – 10I = 0
I = 1 amp. 2mA
Now, iAB = 1mA
2
23. A
VAB 10 103 1 10–3
Si = 10 V
VO1 VO
12V 2
27. A
Ge As we can analyse from circuit
FB
2V
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Semi Conductor | 305
2
i 0.1 A
20
28. AD
By theory of P-n junction
29. B
By theory of semi -conductors
30. D
As the temperature is decreased, then
For copper [conductor] Resistance
For germanium [semi conductor] resis-
tance
31. B
For C.E.
IC
100
IB
1
IB = 0.01mA
100
Now, IE = IB + IC
IE = IB + IC
0.01 + 1
IE = 1.01 mA
32. A
By theory of semi conductor
33. C
By theory of transistor
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
306 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
6. A 16. D
7. B 17. C
When the temperature is decreased, then IC
for copper (i.e. conductor). Resistance
IB
decreases and for germanium (i.e. semi
conductor) resistance increases. IE = IB + IC
IC
8. C
IE – C
9. D 5.488
When temperature is decreased, then for =
5.60 – 5.488
copper (i.e. conductor) R decreases
= 49
and for germanium (i.e. semi conductor) R
increases
18. A
If lattice constant of semi conductor
10. B
decreases the E C & E V decreases but E g
increases
11. A
By theory of p-n junction diode
19. BC
By checking condition for forward bias and
12. C
reverse bias
hc
Eg =
20. D
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
Semi Conductor | 307
25. C
Given figure by analysis is of half wave
rectifier, since diode allowes signal to pass
i
during + ve half cycle only i.e. it is forward
biased.
12V
26. A
Req = 4 + 2 = 6 Y A B
12 Y A.B
i= 2A
6 Y = AB
Truth table
21. D
Diode will be reverse biased for – 5V and
A B Y
hence will not conduct, so voltage across RL
will be zero. 0 0 0
But when + 5V is applied then diode will be
0 1 0
forward biased and hence it will conduct so
voltage across RL will be same as input volt- 1 0 0
age and hence + 5V
Output signal 1 1 1
+ 5V
By using the above truth table, output will
be option (A).
22. D 27. B
P
23. D
A
Since no conduction is found when
multimeter is conected across P & Q it means
either both P & Q are n-type or p-type. X
So it means R is base when R is connected
to common terminal and conduction is seen
when other terminal is connected to P or Q, B
so it means transistor is n-p-h with R as Q
base
P A.A A
24. C
Q = B.B A
If we give following inputs to A & B then
corresponding output C is obtained as shown X = A .B
in truth table.
X = A B
A B C X=A +B
OR gate
0 0 0
28. D
0 1 1
1 0 1
Q
A
1 1 1
P
Y
The above table is similar to OR gate
B R
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
308 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
30. C
P = A.B
By checking condition of F.B. & R.B.
Q = A.AB
31. B
= A AB
As, we know Cu is a conductor, so
R = B.AB with increase in temprature, resistance will
increase linearly. As Si is semi conductor ;
R = B AB
so with increase in temprature, resistance
y = (A AB) . (B AB) will decrease exponatially.
34. AD
29. C
1000V , is not satisfied by option (A), (D)
I e T –1 mA 1–
dV = ± 0.01V
T = 300 K
I = 5mA
I = e1000V/T – 1
I + 1 = e1000V/T
Taking log on both sides
1000V
log (I + 1) =
T
d(I 1) 1000
dv
(I 1) T
dI 1000
dv
1 T
1000
dI = I 1 dv
T
1000
dI = (5 1) 0.01
300
= 0.2 mA
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 309
8. C
By theory
9. B
Theory
10. D
Vmax – Vmin
Vm =
2
Vmax Vmin
Vc =
2
Vm Vmax – Vmin
m= =
Vc Vmax Vmin
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
310 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
3. A 12. C
By theory By theory
13. A
4. A By theory
fc = 81Nmax
14. C
f 2 (40 106 )2 By theory
Nmax = c
81 81
15. C
1600 1012 By theory
Nmax = 20 1012
81
16. D
5. A By theory
By theory
17. C
6. D h = 240 m
By theory d 2hr
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 311
1. B 5. B
In radio communication, sky wave Fre quency spe ctrum of
referes to the propogation of radio modulated wave is
waves reflected or refracted back
towards earth from ionosphere.
Since , it is not limite d by the
LSB USB
curvature of earth, sky wave
propagation can be use d to
communicate be yond horizon.
Ionosphere is the region of upper
Band width
atomosphe re and induce s the
the rmosphere and parts of Clearly, m is not included in spec-
mesosphere and exosphere it is trum.
distinguished because it is ionised by
solar re adiation. It plays an 6. D
important part in atomospheric Only 10% of 10 GHz is utilised for
electricity. transmission
Band available for transmission
2. A 10
= 10 109Hz = 109 Hz
Modulation does not changed time leg 100
betwe en transmission and Now, if there are n channels each
reception. using 5 Khz then ;
n × 5 × 103 = 109
3. D n = 2 × 105
Maximum distance an earth where
object can be detected is ‘d’, then
(h + R)2 = d2 + R2
d2 = h2 + 2Rh
since h << R
d2 = 2Rh
d = 2 (6.4 106 ) 500
d = 80 km
4. A
As we know an amplitude
modulated wave band width is twice
the frequecies of modulating signal.
Therefore A.M., the frequency of the
high frequency carrier wave is made
to vary in propotion to the amplitude
of the audio signal
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
312 | Solution Physics _ 12th Topic
Rough Work
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43